593
|
1 *options.txt* For Vim version 7.0aa. Last change: 2005 Dec 12
|
7
|
2
|
|
3
|
|
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
|
|
5
|
|
6
|
|
7 Options *options*
|
|
8
|
|
9 1. Setting options |set-option|
|
|
10 2. Automatically setting options |auto-setting|
|
|
11 3. Options summary |option-summary|
|
|
12
|
|
13 For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|.
|
|
14
|
|
15 Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
|
|
16 achieve special effects. These options come in three forms:
|
|
17 boolean can only be on or off *boolean* *toggle*
|
|
18 number has a numeric value
|
|
19 string has a string value
|
|
20
|
|
21 ==============================================================================
|
523
|
22 1. Setting options *set-option* *E764*
|
7
|
23
|
|
24 *:se* *:set*
|
|
25 :se[t] Show all options that differ from their default value.
|
|
26
|
|
27 :se[t] all Show all but terminal options.
|
|
28
|
|
29 :se[t] termcap Show all terminal options. Note that in the GUI the
|
|
30 key codes are not shown, because they are generated
|
|
31 internally and can't be changed. Changing the terminal
|
|
32 codes in the GUI is not useful either...
|
|
33
|
|
34 *E518* *E519*
|
|
35 :se[t] {option}? Show value of {option}.
|
|
36
|
|
37 :se[t] {option} Toggle option: set, switch it on.
|
|
38 Number option: show value.
|
|
39 String option: show value.
|
|
40
|
|
41 :se[t] no{option} Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.
|
|
42
|
|
43 :se[t] {option}! or
|
|
44 :se[t] inv{option} Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}
|
|
45
|
|
46 *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
|
|
47 :se[t] {option}& Reset option to its default value. May depend on the
|
|
48 current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi}
|
|
49 :se[t] {option}&vi Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
|
|
50 :se[t] {option}&vim Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}
|
|
51
|
|
52 :se[t] all& Set all options, except terminal options, to their
|
10
|
53 default value. The values of 'term', 'lines' and
|
7
|
54 'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}
|
|
55
|
|
56 *:set-args* *E487* *E521*
|
|
57 :se[t] {option}={value} or
|
|
58 :se[t] {option}:{value}
|
|
59 Set string or number option to {value}.
|
|
60 For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
|
|
61 hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0')
|
|
62 (hex and octal are only available for machines which
|
|
63 have the strtol() function).
|
|
64 The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
|
|
65 default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
|
|
66 set). See |cmdline-completion|.
|
|
67 White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
|
|
68 will be ignored. White space between '=' and {value}
|
|
69 is not allowed.
|
|
70 See |option-backslash| for using white space and
|
|
71 backslashes in {value}.
|
|
72
|
|
73 :se[t] {option}+={value} *:set+=*
|
|
74 Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
|
|
75 {value} to a string option. When the option is a
|
|
76 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
|
|
77 value was empty.
|
|
78 If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
|
557
|
79 are removed. When adding a flag that was already
|
|
80 present the option value doesn't change.
|
7
|
81 < Also see |:set-args| above.
|
|
82 {not in Vi}
|
|
83
|
|
84 :se[t] {option}^={value} *:set^=*
|
|
85 Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
|
|
86 the {value} to a string option. When the option is a
|
|
87 comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
|
|
88 value was empty.
|
|
89 Also see |:set-args| above.
|
|
90 {not in Vi}
|
|
91
|
|
92 :se[t] {option}-={value} *:set-=*
|
|
93 Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
|
|
94 the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
|
|
95 If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
|
|
96 is no error or warning. When the option is a comma
|
|
97 separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
|
|
98 becomes empty.
|
|
99 When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
|
|
100 exactly as they appear in the option. Remove flags
|
|
101 one by one to avoid problems.
|
|
102 Also see |:set-args| above.
|
|
103 {not in Vi}
|
|
104
|
|
105 The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated. For example: >
|
|
106 :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
|
|
107 If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
|
|
108 and the following arguments will be ignored.
|
|
109
|
|
110 *:set-verbose*
|
|
111 When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
|
|
112 was last set. Example: >
|
|
113 :verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
|
|
114 shiftwidth=4
|
|
115 Last set from modeline
|
|
116 cindent
|
|
117 Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim
|
|
118 This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":set
|
|
119 all" or ":set" without an argument.
|
|
120 When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message. There is only
|
|
121 one value for all local options with the same name. Thus the message applies
|
|
122 to the option name, not necessarily its value.
|
|
123 When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
|
|
124 autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
|
|
125 Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting
|
|
126 'compatible'.
|
|
127 {not available when compiled without the +eval feature}
|
|
128
|
|
129 *:set-termcap* *E522*
|
|
130 For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a termcap option. This will
|
|
131 override the value from the termcap. You can then use it in a mapping. If
|
|
132 the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: >
|
|
133 :set <t_#4>=^[Ot
|
|
134 This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key. For
|
|
135 example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
|
|
136 :set <M-b>=^[b
|
|
137 (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
|
|
138 The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.
|
|
139
|
36
|
140 The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
141 security reasons.
|
|
142
|
7
|
143 The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi. Long string options are put
|
10
|
144 at the end of the list. The number of options is quite large. The output of
|
7
|
145 "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
|
|
146 |more-prompt|.
|
|
147
|
|
148 *option-backslash*
|
|
149 To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
|
|
150 backslash. To include a backslash you have to use two. Effectively this
|
|
151 means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
|
|
152 down).
|
|
153 A few examples: >
|
|
154 :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags results in "tags /usr/tags"
|
|
155 :set tags=tags\\,file results in "tags\,file"
|
|
156 :set tags=tags\\\ file results in "tags\ file"
|
|
157
|
10
|
158 The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command. To
|
|
159 include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead. This example sets the
|
7
|
160 'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
|
|
161 :set titlestring=hi\|there
|
|
162 This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
|
|
163 :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there
|
|
164
|
10
|
165 For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed. More
|
7
|
166 precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment
|
|
167 variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not
|
|
168 removed. But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,
|
|
169 etc.) is used like explained above.
|
|
170 There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
|
|
171 :set dir=\\machine\path results in "\\machine\path"
|
|
172 :set dir=\\\\machine\\path results in "\\machine\path"
|
|
173 :set dir=\\path\\file results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
|
|
174 For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
|
|
175 are halved. This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
|
10
|
176 halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept. The third gives a
|
7
|
177 result which is probably not what you want. Avoid it.
|
|
178
|
|
179 *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
|
|
180 *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552*
|
|
181 Some options are a list of flags. When you want to add a flag to such an
|
|
182 option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
|
|
183 :set guioptions+=a
|
|
184 Remove a flag from an option like this: >
|
|
185 :set guioptions-=a
|
|
186 This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
|
10
|
187 Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time. If 'guioptions' has
|
7
|
188 the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
|
|
189 doesn't appear.
|
|
190
|
|
191 *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
|
22
|
192 Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded. If the
|
7
|
193 environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
|
|
194 name is replaced with its value. If it does not exist the '$' and the name
|
|
195 are not modified. Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
|
|
196 follow the environment variable name. That character and what follows is
|
|
197 appended to the value of the environment variable. Examples: >
|
|
198 :set term=$TERM.new
|
|
199 :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
|
|
200 When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
|
|
201 opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.
|
|
202
|
|
203
|
|
204 Handling of local options *local-options*
|
|
205
|
|
206 Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer. Each window or buffer
|
|
207 has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value. This
|
|
208 allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another. And set
|
|
209 'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.
|
|
210
|
|
211 The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
|
|
212 situations. You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
|
|
213 the option values you would expect. Unfortunately, doing what the user
|
|
214 expects is a bit complicated...
|
|
215
|
|
216 When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window. Thus
|
|
217 right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.
|
|
218
|
|
219 When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized. Since
|
|
220 the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
|
|
221 these are not used. Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
|
|
222 global value, which is used for new buffers. With ":set" both the local and
|
|
223 global value is changed. With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
|
|
224 thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.
|
|
225
|
|
226 When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
|
|
227 options are used again. If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
|
|
228 values from back then are used. Otherwise the values from the window where
|
|
229 the buffer was edited last are used.
|
|
230
|
|
231 It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
|
|
232 When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
|
|
233 using these local window options. Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
|
|
234 local window options, which is used when editing another buffer. Each window
|
|
235 has its own copy of these values. Thus these are local to the window, but
|
|
236 global to all buffers in the window. With this you can do: >
|
|
237 :e one
|
|
238 :set list
|
|
239 :e two
|
|
240 Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
|
|
241 command you have also set the global value. >
|
|
242 :set nolist
|
|
243 :e one
|
|
244 :setlocal list
|
|
245 :e two
|
|
246 Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
|
|
247 value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
|
|
248 global value. Note that if you do this next: >
|
|
249 :e one
|
|
250 You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
|
10
|
251 "one". The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.
|
7
|
252
|
|
253 *:setl* *:setlocal*
|
|
254 :setl[ocal] ... Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
|
|
255 current buffer or window. Not all options have a
|
|
256 local value. If the option does not have a local
|
|
257 value the global value is set.
|
|
258 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
|
|
259 local values.
|
|
260 Without argument: Display all local option's local
|
|
261 values which are different from the default.
|
|
262 When displaying a specific local option, show the
|
|
263 local value. For a global option the global value is
|
|
264 shown (but that might change in the future).
|
|
265 {not in Vi}
|
|
266
|
|
267 :setl[ocal] {option}< Set the local value of {option} to its global value.
|
|
268 {not in Vi}
|
|
269
|
|
270 *:setg* *:setglobal*
|
|
271 :setg[lobal] ... Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
|
|
272 option without changing the local value.
|
|
273 When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
|
|
274 With the "all" argument: display all local option's
|
|
275 global values.
|
|
276 Without argument: display all local option's global
|
|
277 values which are different from the default.
|
|
278 {not in Vi}
|
|
279
|
|
280 For buffer-local and window-local options:
|
|
281 Command global value local value ~
|
|
282 :set option=value set set
|
|
283 :setlocal option=value - set
|
|
284 :setglobal option=value set -
|
|
285 :set option? - display
|
|
286 :setlocal option? - display
|
|
287 :setglobal option? display -
|
|
288
|
|
289
|
|
290 Global options with a local value *global-local*
|
|
291
|
40
|
292 Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows.
|
|
293 For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.
|
|
294 You can set the local value with ":setlocal". That buffer or window will then
|
|
295 use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global
|
|
296 value.
|
7
|
297
|
|
298 For example, you have two windows, both on C source code. They use the global
|
|
299 'makeprg' option. If you do this in one of the two windows: >
|
|
300 :set makeprg=gmake
|
|
301 then the other window will switch to the same value. There is no need to set
|
|
302 the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
|
|
303 However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
|
|
304 another 'makeprog' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
|
10
|
305 files. You use this command: >
|
7
|
306 :setlocal makeprg=perlmake
|
|
307 You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
|
|
308 :setlocal makeprg=
|
|
309 This only works for a string option. For a boolean option you need to use the
|
|
310 "<" flag, like this: >
|
|
311 :setlocal autoread<
|
|
312 Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
|
|
313 local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
|
|
314 when changing the global value later).
|
|
315 Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local. Using
|
|
316 ":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.
|
|
317
|
|
318
|
|
319 Setting the filetype
|
|
320
|
|
321 :setf[iletype] {filetype} *:setf* *:setfiletype*
|
|
322 Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
|
|
323 not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
|
|
324 This is short for: >
|
|
325 :if !did_filetype()
|
|
326 : setlocal filetype={filetype}
|
|
327 :endif
|
|
328 < This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
|
|
329 setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
|
|
330 settings and syntax files to be loaded.
|
|
331 {not in Vi}
|
|
332
|
|
333 :bro[wse] se[t] *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
|
|
334 :opt[ions] Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
|
|
335 Options are grouped by function.
|
|
336 Offers short help for each option. Hit <CR> on the
|
|
337 short help to open a help window with more help for
|
|
338 the option.
|
|
339 Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
|
|
340 "set" line to set the new value. For window and
|
|
341 buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
|
|
342 used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
|
|
343 window, in which case the window below help window is
|
|
344 used (skipping the option-window).
|
|
345 {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
|
|
346 |+autocmd| features}
|
|
347
|
|
348 *$HOME*
|
|
349 Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
|
|
350 option and after a space or comma.
|
|
351
|
|
352 On Unix systems "~user" can be used too. It is replaced by the home directory
|
|
353 of user "user". Example: >
|
|
354 :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.
|
|
355
|
|
356 On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too. The name between {} can
|
|
357 contain non-id characters then. Note that if you want to use this for the
|
|
358 "gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
|
|
359
|
|
360 NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
|
|
361 command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".
|
|
362
|
|
363
|
|
364 Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited. How much depends on
|
|
365 the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
|
|
366
|
|
367 *:fix* *:fixdel*
|
|
368 :fix[del] Set the value of 't_kD':
|
|
369 't_kb' is 't_kD' becomes ~
|
|
370 CTRL-? CTRL-H
|
|
371 not CTRL-? CTRL-?
|
|
372
|
|
373 (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi}
|
|
374
|
|
375 If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the
|
|
376 code for backspace is alright, you can put this in
|
|
377 your .vimrc: >
|
|
378 :fixdel
|
|
379 < This works no matter what the actual code for
|
|
380 backspace is.
|
|
381
|
|
382 If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can
|
|
383 use this: >
|
|
384 :if &term == "termname"
|
|
385 : set t_kb=^V<BS>
|
|
386 : fixdel
|
|
387 :endif
|
|
388 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key
|
10
|
389 (don't type four characters!). Replace "termname"
|
7
|
390 with your terminal name.
|
|
391
|
|
392 If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not
|
|
393 CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel". Then use: >
|
|
394 :if &term == "termname"
|
|
395 : set t_kD=^V<Delete>
|
|
396 :endif
|
|
397 < Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key
|
|
398 (don't type eight characters!). Replace "termname"
|
|
399 with your terminal name.
|
|
400
|
|
401 *Linux-backspace*
|
|
402 Note about Linux: By default the backspace key
|
|
403 produces CTRL-?, which is wrong. You can fix it by
|
|
404 putting this line in your rc.local: >
|
|
405 echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys
|
|
406 <
|
|
407 *NetBSD-backspace*
|
|
408 Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce
|
|
409 the right code, try this: >
|
|
410 xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"
|
|
411 < If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: >
|
|
412 keysym 22 = BackSpace
|
|
413 < You need to restart for this to take effect.
|
|
414
|
|
415 ==============================================================================
|
|
416 2. Automatically setting options *auto-setting*
|
|
417
|
|
418 Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives
|
|
419 to set options automatically for one or more files:
|
|
420
|
|
421 1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places. See
|
|
422 |initialization|. Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,
|
|
423 and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.
|
|
424 You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and
|
|
425 |:mksession|.
|
|
426 2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.
|
|
427 This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and
|
|
428 many other things. See |autocommand|.
|
|
429 3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a
|
|
430 number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for
|
|
431 modelines. This is explained here.
|
|
432
|
|
433 *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
|
|
434 There are two forms of modelines. The first form:
|
|
435 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}
|
|
436
|
|
437 [text] any text or empty
|
|
438 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
|
|
439 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
|
|
440 [white] optional white space
|
|
441 {options} a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
|
|
442 where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
|
|
443 command
|
|
444
|
|
445 Example: >
|
|
446 vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6
|
|
447
|
|
448 The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):
|
|
449
|
|
450 [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]
|
|
451
|
|
452 [text] any text or empty
|
|
453 {white} at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
|
|
454 {vi:|vim:|ex:} the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
|
|
455 [white] optional white space
|
|
456 se[t] the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
|
|
457 {options} a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
|
|
458 argument for a ":set" command
|
|
459 : a colon
|
|
460 [text] any text or empty
|
|
461
|
|
462 Example: >
|
|
463 /* vim: set ai tw=75: */
|
|
464
|
|
465 The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required. This minimizes the chance
|
|
466 that a normal word like "lex:" is caught. There is one exception: "vi:" and
|
|
467 "vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
|
|
468 3.0). Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
|
|
469 short for "example:").
|
|
470
|
|
471 *modeline-local*
|
|
472 The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
|
11
|
473 buffer and window that contain the file. Although it's possible to set global
|
|
474 options from a modeline, this is unusual. If you have two windows open and
|
|
475 the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result
|
|
476 depends on which one was opened last.
|
7
|
477
|
23
|
478 When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options
|
|
479 from the modeline are used. Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local
|
|
480 option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer
|
|
481 in another window. But window-local options will be set.
|
|
482
|
7
|
483 *modeline-version*
|
|
484 If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
|
|
485 number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
|
|
486 vim{vers}: version {vers} or later
|
|
487 vim<{vers}: version before {vers}
|
|
488 vim={vers}: version {vers}
|
|
489 vim>{vers}: version after {vers}
|
|
490 {vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
|
|
491 For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: >
|
|
492 /* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */
|
|
493 To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: >
|
|
494 /* vim<570: set sw=4: */
|
|
495 There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
|
|
496
|
|
497
|
|
498 The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
|
|
499 If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.
|
|
500
|
|
501 Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
|
|
502 like: >
|
|
503 /* vi:ts=4: */
|
|
504 will give an error message for the trailing "*/". This line is OK: >
|
|
505 /* vi:set ts=4: */
|
|
506
|
|
507 If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.
|
|
508
|
|
509 If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'. The
|
10
|
510 backslash in front of the ':' will be removed. Example: >
|
7
|
511 /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */
|
|
512 This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp". Only a single backslash before the
|
|
513 ':' is removed. Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
|
|
514
|
|
515 No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
|
|
516 might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).
|
|
517
|
|
518 Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
|
|
519 define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string. For
|
|
520 example: >
|
|
521 au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
|
|
522 And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
|
|
523 "VAR".
|
|
524
|
|
525 ==============================================================================
|
|
526 3. Options summary *option-summary*
|
|
527
|
|
528 In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
|
|
529 an abbreviation if there is one. Both forms may be used.
|
|
530
|
|
531 In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
|
|
532 is entered. When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.
|
|
533
|
|
534 For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is
|
|
535 used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when
|
|
536 'compatible' is set.
|
|
537
|
|
538 Most options are the same in all windows and buffers. There are a few that
|
10
|
539 are specific to how the text is presented in a window. These can be set to a
|
7
|
540 different value in each window. For example the 'list' option can be set in
|
|
541 one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
|
|
542 at the same time. There are a few options that are specific to a certain
|
|
543 file. These can have a different value for each file or buffer. For example
|
|
544 the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
|
|
545 program.
|
|
546
|
|
547 global one option for all buffers and windows
|
|
548 local to window each window has its own copy of this option
|
|
549 local to buffer each buffer has its own copy of this option
|
|
550
|
|
551 When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
|
|
552 are used as a default value for the window-specific options. For the
|
|
553 buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
|
|
554 'cpoptions' option. If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
|
|
555 buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
|
10
|
556 first entered. If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
|
|
557 is entered, this is almost like having global options. If 's' and 'S' are not
|
7
|
558 present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
|
|
559 buffer is created.
|
|
560
|
519
|
561 Hidden options *hidden-options*
|
|
562
|
|
563 Not all options are supported in all versions. This depends on the supported
|
|
564 features and sometimes on the system. A remark about this is in curly braces
|
|
565 below. When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an
|
|
566 error, this is called a hidden option. You can't get the value of a hidden
|
|
567 option though, it is not stored.
|
|
568
|
|
569 To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this: >
|
|
570 if exists('&foo')
|
|
571 This also returns true for a hidden option. To test if option "foo" is really
|
|
572 supported use something like this: >
|
|
573 if exists('+foo')
|
|
574 <
|
7
|
575 *E355*
|
|
576 A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
|
|
577
|
|
578 *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph*
|
|
579 'aleph' 'al' number (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)
|
|
580 global
|
|
581 {not in Vi}
|
|
582 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
583 feature}
|
|
584 The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet. The
|
|
585 routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode
|
|
586 (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)
|
|
587 outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].
|
|
588 aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.
|
|
589 See |rileft.txt|.
|
|
590
|
|
591 *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
|
|
592 'allowrevins' 'ari' boolean (default off)
|
|
593 global
|
|
594 {not in Vi}
|
|
595 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
596 feature}
|
|
597 Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode. This is default off, to
|
|
598 avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
|
|
599 into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out. See
|
|
600 'revins'.
|
|
601 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
602
|
|
603 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'*
|
|
604 'altkeymap' 'akm' boolean (default off)
|
|
605 global
|
|
606 {not in Vi}
|
|
607 {only available when compiled with the |+farsi|
|
|
608 feature}
|
233
|
609 When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles
|
7
|
610 the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.
|
|
611
|
233
|
612 When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This
|
7
|
613 is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right
|
|
614 mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left
|
10
|
615 mode). See |farsi.txt|.
|
7
|
616
|
|
617 *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
|
|
618 'ambiwidth' 'ambw' string (default: "single")
|
|
619 global
|
|
620 {not in Vi}
|
|
621 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
622 feature}
|
|
623 Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.
|
|
624 Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
|
|
625 Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
|
|
626 letters, Cyrillic letters).
|
|
627
|
|
628 There are currently two possible values:
|
233
|
629 "single": Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is
|
7
|
630 expected by most users.
|
|
631 "double": Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
|
|
632
|
|
633 There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
|
|
634 those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
|
|
635 legacy/traditional CJK encodings. In those encodings, Euro,
|
|
636 Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
|
233
|
637 therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also
|
7
|
638 true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
|
233
|
639 file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
|
7
|
640 Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
|
|
641 (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
|
|
642 this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
|
|
643 by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font. Perhaps it also has
|
|
644 to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP
|
|
645 when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales. See Unicode
|
|
646 Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
|
|
647
|
|
648 *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
|
|
649 'antialias' 'anti' boolean (default: off)
|
|
650 global
|
|
651 {not in Vi}
|
|
652 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled
|
|
653 on Mac OS X}
|
|
654 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X
|
|
655 v10.2 or later. When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts,
|
|
656 which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays.
|
|
657 Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set
|
|
658 to its default (empty string).
|
|
659
|
|
660 *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'*
|
|
661 'autochdir' 'acd' boolean (default off)
|
|
662 global
|
|
663 {not in Vi}
|
|
664 {only available when compiled with the
|
|
665 |+netbeans_intg| or |+sun_workshop| feature}
|
438
|
666 When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
|
|
667 open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
|
|
668 It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
|
|
669 or selected.
|
|
670 This option is provided for backward compatibility with the Vim
|
|
671 released with Sun ONE Studio 4 Enterprise Edition.
|
|
672 Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work. The directory
|
|
673 browser sets if off.
|
7
|
674
|
|
675 *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
|
|
676 'arabic' 'arab' boolean (default off)
|
|
677 local to window
|
|
678 {not in Vi}
|
|
679 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
|
|
680 feature}
|
|
681 This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
|
|
682 Setting this option will:
|
|
683 - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
|
|
684 - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
|
|
685 - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
|
|
686 between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
|
|
687 - Set the 'delcombine' option
|
|
688 Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.
|
|
689
|
|
690 Resetting this option will:
|
|
691 - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
|
|
692 - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
|
|
693 Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
|
|
694 option.
|
|
695 Also see |arabic.txt|.
|
|
696
|
|
697 *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
|
|
698 *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
|
|
699 'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on)
|
|
700 global
|
|
701 {not in Vi}
|
|
702 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
|
|
703 feature}
|
|
704 When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
|
|
705 corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
|
|
706 take affect. Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
|
|
707 one which encompasses:
|
|
708 a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
|
|
709 within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
|
|
710 b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
|
|
711 c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
|
|
712 When disabled the character display reverts back to each character's
|
|
713 true stand-alone form.
|
|
714 Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
|
|
715 further details see |arabic.txt|.
|
|
716
|
|
717 *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
|
|
718 'autoindent' 'ai' boolean (default off)
|
|
719 local to buffer
|
|
720 Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
|
|
721 in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command). If you do not
|
|
722 type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
|
10
|
723 <Esc> or <CR>, the indent is deleted again. Moving the cursor to
|
|
724 another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included in
|
|
725 'cpoptions'.
|
|
726 When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
|
|
727 reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
|
|
728 line.
|
7
|
729 When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
|
|
730 a different way.
|
|
731 The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
732 {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
|
|
733 <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
|
|
734 deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.
|
|
735
|
|
736 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
|
|
737 'autoread' 'ar' boolean (default off)
|
|
738 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
739 {not in Vi}
|
|
740 When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
|
|
741 it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
|
|
742 When the file has been deleted this is not done. |timestamp|
|
|
743 If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
|
|
744 using the global value: >
|
|
745 :set autoread<
|
|
746 <
|
|
747 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
|
|
748 'autowrite' 'aw' boolean (default off)
|
|
749 global
|
|
750 Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
|
|
751 :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,
|
|
752 :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a CTRL-O, CTRL-I,
|
|
753 '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.
|
|
754 Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
|
|
755 'autowriteall' for that.
|
|
756
|
|
757 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
|
|
758 'autowriteall' 'awa' boolean (default off)
|
|
759 global
|
|
760 {not in Vi}
|
|
761 Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",
|
|
762 ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
|
|
763 Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
|
|
764 been set.
|
|
765
|
|
766 *'background'* *'bg'*
|
|
767 'background' 'bg' string (default "dark" or "light")
|
|
768 global
|
|
769 {not in Vi}
|
|
770 When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a
|
|
771 dark background. When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that
|
|
772 look good on a light background. Any other value is illegal.
|
|
773 Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.
|
|
774 This will not always be correct.
|
|
775 Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim
|
|
776 what the background color looks like. For changing the background
|
|
777 color, see |:hi-normal|.
|
|
778
|
|
779 When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for
|
10
|
780 the new value. But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not
|
7
|
781 change.
|
|
782 When a color scheme is loaded (the "colors_name" variable is set)
|
|
783 setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded. If
|
|
784 the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
|
|
785 However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
|
|
786 be undone. First delete the "colors_name" variable when needed.
|
|
787
|
|
788 When setting 'background' to the default value with: >
|
|
789 :set background&
|
|
790 < Vim will guess the value. In the GUI this should work correctly,
|
|
791 in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
|
|
792
|
|
793 When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
|
|
794 "light". When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
|
|
795 that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to
|
|
796 "dark". But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read
|
|
797 (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background
|
|
798 color). To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by
|
|
799 putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value
|
|
800 of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").
|
|
801 Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file. Possibly
|
|
802 depending on the terminal name. Example: >
|
|
803 :if &term == "pcterm"
|
|
804 : set background=dark
|
|
805 :endif
|
|
806 < When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
|
|
807 will change. To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
|
|
808 the setting of the 'background' option.
|
|
809 This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
|
|
810 to select the colors for syntax highlighting. After changing this
|
|
811 option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result. This can be
|
|
812 done with ":syntax on".
|
|
813
|
|
814 *'backspace'* *'bs'*
|
|
815 'backspace' 'bs' string (default "")
|
|
816 global
|
|
817 {not in Vi}
|
|
818 Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
|
|
819 mode. This is a list of items, separated by commas. Each item allows
|
|
820 a way to backspace over something:
|
|
821 value effect ~
|
|
822 indent allow backspacing over autoindent
|
|
823 eol allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
|
|
824 start allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
|
|
825 stop once at the start of insert.
|
|
826
|
|
827 When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.
|
|
828
|
|
829 For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:
|
|
830 value effect ~
|
|
831 0 same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)
|
|
832 1 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"
|
|
833 2 same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"
|
|
834
|
|
835 See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.
|
|
836 NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
837
|
|
838 *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
|
|
839 'backup' 'bk' boolean (default off)
|
|
840 global
|
|
841 {not in Vi}
|
|
842 Make a backup before overwriting a file. Leave it around after the
|
|
843 file has been successfully written. If you do not want to keep the
|
|
844 backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
|
|
845 written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
|
|
846 the default). If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
|
10
|
847 options (use this if your file system is almost full). See the
|
7
|
848 |backup-table| for more explanations.
|
|
849 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
|
|
850 When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
|
|
851 oldest version of a file.
|
|
852 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
853
|
|
854 *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
|
|
855 'backupcopy' 'bkc' string (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")
|
|
856 global
|
|
857 {not in Vi}
|
|
858 When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
|
|
859 done. This is a comma separated list of words.
|
|
860
|
|
861 The main values are:
|
|
862 "yes" make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
|
|
863 "no" rename the file and write a new one
|
|
864 "auto" one of the previous, what works best
|
|
865
|
|
866 Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
|
|
867 "breaksymlink" always break symlinks when writing
|
|
868 "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing
|
|
869
|
|
870 Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
|
|
871 - Takes extra time to copy the file.
|
|
872 + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
|
|
873 has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
|
|
874 - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
|
|
875 not of the real file.
|
|
876
|
|
877 Renaming the file and writing a new one:
|
|
878 + It's fast.
|
|
879 - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
|
|
880 file.
|
|
881 - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.
|
|
882
|
|
883 The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file
|
|
884 is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and
|
|
885 and the file is not a link) that is used. When problems are expected,
|
|
886 a copy will be made.
|
|
887
|
|
888 The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
|
|
889 combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto". When included, they
|
|
890 force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
|
|
891 exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
|
|
892 become the backup and writing a new file in its place. This can be
|
|
893 useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
|
|
894 hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
|
|
895 be propagated back to the original source.
|
|
896 *crontab*
|
|
897 One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
|
|
898 that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
|
|
899 the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
|
10
|
900 backup file instead of the newly created file. "crontab -e" is an
|
7
|
901 example.
|
|
902
|
|
903 When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
|
|
904 with the new text. This means that protection bits, owner and
|
|
905 symbolic links of the original file are unmodified. The backup file
|
10
|
906 however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file. The
|
7
|
907 group of the backup is set to the group of the original file. If this
|
|
908 fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
|
|
909 others.
|
|
910
|
|
911 When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has
|
|
912 the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
|
|
913 is owned by the current user. When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
|
|
914 link, the new file will not! That's why the "auto" value doesn't
|
|
915 rename when the file is a link. The owner and group of the newly
|
|
916 written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
|
|
917 the system may refuse to do this. In that case the "auto" value will
|
|
918 again not rename the file.
|
|
919
|
|
920 *'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
|
|
921 'backupdir' 'bdir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
|
|
922 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp"
|
|
923 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")
|
|
924 global
|
|
925 {not in Vi}
|
|
926 List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
|
|
927 - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
|
|
928 where this is possible.
|
|
929 - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
|
|
930 impossible!). Writing may fail because of this.
|
|
931 - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
|
|
932 as the edited file.
|
33
|
933 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
|
7
|
934 put the backup file relative to where the edited file is. The
|
|
935 leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
|
|
936 ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
|
|
937 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
|
|
938 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
|
|
939 name, precede it with a backslash.
|
|
940 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
|
|
941 - A directory name may end in an '/'.
|
|
942 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
943 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
|
|
944 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
|
|
945 :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
|
|
946 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
|
|
947 of the option is removed.
|
|
948 See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
|
|
949 If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
|
|
950 :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
|
|
951 < You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
|
|
952 home directory for this to work properly.
|
|
953 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
954 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
955 uses another default.
|
|
956 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
957 security reasons.
|
|
958
|
|
959 *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
|
|
960 'backupext' 'bex' string (default "~", for VMS: "_")
|
|
961 global
|
|
962 {not in Vi}
|
|
963 String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
|
|
964 backup file. The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
|
|
965 accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file. You might
|
|
966 prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
|
|
967 ".bak" that you want to keep.
|
36
|
968 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
7
|
969
|
26
|
970 If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
|
|
971 autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
|
|
972 include a timestamp. >
|
|
973 :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~'
|
|
974 < Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.
|
|
975
|
7
|
976 *'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
|
|
977 'backupskip' 'bsk' string (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
|
|
978 global
|
|
979 {not in Vi}
|
|
980 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
|
|
981 feature}
|
|
982 A list of file patterns. When one of the patterns matches with the
|
|
983 name of the file which is written, no backup file is created. Both
|
|
984 the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
|
|
985 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
|
|
986 Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
|
|
987 When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
|
233
|
988 default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
|
557
|
989 Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a
|
|
990 backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see
|
|
991 the newly created file). Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|.
|
7
|
992
|
|
993 *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'*
|
|
994 'balloondelay' 'bdlay' number (default: 600)
|
|
995 global
|
|
996 {not in Vi}
|
|
997 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
|
|
998 feature}
|
|
999 Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up. See |balloon-eval|.
|
|
1000
|
|
1001 *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'*
|
|
1002 'ballooneval' 'beval' boolean (default off)
|
|
1003 global
|
|
1004 {not in Vi}
|
|
1005 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
|
189
|
1006 feature}
|
7
|
1007 Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.
|
|
1008
|
189
|
1009 *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'*
|
|
1010 'balloonexpr' 'bexpr' string (default "")
|
|
1011 global
|
|
1012 {not in Vi}
|
|
1013 {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
|
|
1014 feature}
|
|
1015 Expression to show in evaluation balloon. It is only used when
|
|
1016 'ballooneval' is on. These variables can be used:
|
|
1017
|
|
1018 v:beval_bufnr number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show
|
|
1019 v:beval_winnr number of the window
|
|
1020 v:beval_lnum line number
|
|
1021 v:beval_col column number (byte index)
|
|
1022 v:beval_text word under or after the mouse pointer
|
|
1023
|
|
1024 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!
|
|
1025 Example: >
|
|
1026 function! MyBalloonExpr()
|
435
|
1027 return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum .
|
189
|
1028 \', column ' . v:beval_col .
|
|
1029 \ ' of file ' . bufname(v:beval_bufnr) .
|
|
1030 \ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"'
|
|
1031 endfunction
|
|
1032 set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr()
|
|
1033 set ballooneval
|
|
1034 <
|
|
1035 NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text
|
|
1036 character. If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty,
|
|
1037 Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans
|
|
1038 or Sun Workshop).
|
|
1039
|
446
|
1040 To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: >
|
435
|
1041 if has("balloon_multiline")
|
|
1042 <
|
7
|
1043 *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
|
|
1044 'binary' 'bin' boolean (default off)
|
|
1045 local to buffer
|
|
1046 {not in Vi}
|
|
1047 This option should be set before editing a binary file. You can also
|
|
1048 use the |-b| Vim argument. When this option is switched on a few
|
|
1049 options will be changed (also when it already was on):
|
|
1050 'textwidth' will be set to 0
|
|
1051 'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
|
|
1052 'modeline' will be off
|
|
1053 'expandtab' will be off
|
|
1054 Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
|
|
1055 file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
|
|
1056 separates lines).
|
|
1057 The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
|
|
1058 file is read without conversion.
|
|
1059 NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
|
|
1060 on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
|
|
1061 'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing. You might want to set
|
|
1062 'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
|
|
1063 The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
|
|
1064 'bin' is switched from on to off. Each buffer has its own set of
|
|
1065 saved option values.
|
|
1066 To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
|
|
1067 This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
|
|
1068 files you edit.
|
|
1069 When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
|
|
1070 there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
|
|
1071 the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer). See
|
|
1072 the 'endofline' option.
|
|
1073
|
|
1074 *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'*
|
|
1075 'bioskey' 'biosk' boolean (default on)
|
|
1076 global
|
|
1077 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
|
446
|
1078 When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character. This works
|
7
|
1079 better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console. When using a
|
|
1080 terminal over a serial port reset this option.
|
|
1081 Also see |'conskey'|.
|
|
1082
|
|
1083 *'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
|
|
1084 'bomb' boolean (default off)
|
|
1085 local to buffer
|
|
1086 {not in Vi}
|
|
1087 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
1088 feature}
|
|
1089 When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
|
|
1090 Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
|
|
1091 - this option is on
|
|
1092 - the 'binary' option is off
|
|
1093 - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
|
|
1094 endian variants.
|
|
1095 Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
|
|
1096 Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows. For other applications it
|
|
1097 causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
|
|
1098 appear halfway the resulting file.
|
|
1099 When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
|
|
1100 check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
|
|
1101 Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
|
|
1102 don't see it when editing. When you don't change the options, the BOM
|
|
1103 will be restored when writing the file.
|
|
1104
|
|
1105 *'breakat'* *'brk'*
|
|
1106 'breakat' 'brk' string (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
|
|
1107 global
|
|
1108 {not in Vi}
|
|
1109 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
|
1110 feature}
|
|
1111 This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
|
500
|
1112 break if 'linebreak' is on. Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit
|
|
1113 characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding.
|
7
|
1114
|
|
1115 *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
|
29
|
1116 'browsedir' 'bsdir' string (default: "last")
|
7
|
1117 global
|
|
1118 {not in Vi} {only for Motif and Win32 GUI}
|
|
1119 Which directory to use for the file browser:
|
|
1120 last Use same directory as with last file browser.
|
|
1121 buffer Use the directory of the related buffer.
|
|
1122 current Use the current directory.
|
|
1123 {path} Use the specified directory
|
|
1124
|
|
1125 *'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
|
|
1126 'bufhidden' 'bh' string (default: "")
|
|
1127 local to buffer
|
|
1128 {not in Vi}
|
|
1129 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
1130 feature}
|
|
1131 This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
|
|
1132 displayed in a window:
|
|
1133 <empty> follow the global 'hidden' option
|
|
1134 hide hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'
|
|
1135 is not set
|
|
1136 unload unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using
|
|
1137 |:hide|
|
|
1138 delete delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when
|
|
1139 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
|
|
1140 |:bdelete|
|
|
1141 wipe wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when
|
|
1142 'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
|
|
1143 |:bwipeout|
|
|
1144
|
82
|
1145 CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
|
|
1146 are lost without a warning.
|
7
|
1147 This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
|
|
1148 special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
|
1149
|
|
1150 *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85*
|
|
1151 'buflisted' 'bl' boolean (default: on)
|
|
1152 local to buffer
|
|
1153 {not in Vi}
|
|
1154 When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list. If
|
|
1155 it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
|
|
1156 This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
|
|
1157 a file name or marks. Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
|
|
1158 But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
|
|
1159
|
|
1160 *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
|
|
1161 'buftype' 'bt' string (default: "")
|
|
1162 local to buffer
|
|
1163 {not in Vi}
|
|
1164 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
1165 feature}
|
|
1166 The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
|
|
1167 <empty> normal buffer
|
|
1168 nofile buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
|
|
1169 written
|
|
1170 nowrite buffer which will not be written
|
17
|
1171 acwrite buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd
|
|
1172 autocommands. {not available when compiled without the
|
|
1173 |+autocmd| feature}
|
7
|
1174 quickfix quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
|
|
1175 help help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
|
|
1176 manually)
|
|
1177
|
|
1178 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
|
|
1179 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
|
1180
|
|
1181 Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
|
|
1182
|
|
1183 A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list. This value is
|
|
1184 set by the |:cwindow| command and you are not supposed to change it.
|
|
1185
|
|
1186 "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
|
|
1187 both: The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
|
|
1188 work (":w filename" does work though).
|
|
1189 both: The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
|
|
1190 There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
|
|
1191 example when you quit Vim.
|
|
1192 both: A swap file is only created when using too much memory
|
|
1193 (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
|
|
1194 file).
|
|
1195 nofile only: The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
|
|
1196 file name. It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
|
|
1197 command.
|
17
|
1198 *E676*
|
|
1199 "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
|
|
1200 "nofile", but it will be written. Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
|
|
1201 "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
|
|
1202 without saving. For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
|
|
1203 |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.
|
7
|
1204
|
|
1205 *'casemap'* *'cmp'*
|
|
1206 'casemap' 'cmp' string (default: "internal,keepascii")
|
|
1207 global
|
|
1208 {not in Vi}
|
|
1209 Specifies details about changing the case of letters. It may contain
|
|
1210 these words, separated by a comma:
|
|
1211 internal Use internal case mapping functions, the current
|
|
1212 locale does not change the case mapping. This only
|
493
|
1213 matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding,
|
|
1214 "latin1" or "iso-8859-15". When "internal" is
|
|
1215 omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library
|
|
1216 functions are used when available.
|
7
|
1217 keepascii For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
|
|
1218 case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
|
|
1219 This probably only matters for Turkish.
|
|
1220
|
|
1221 *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
|
|
1222 'cdpath' 'cd' string (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
|
|
1223 global
|
|
1224 {not in Vi}
|
|
1225 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
1226 |+file_in_path| feature}
|
|
1227 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|
|
1228 |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched
|
|
1229 for has a relative path (not starting with "/", "./" or "../").
|
|
1230 The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
|
|
1231 |'path'|. Also see |file-searching|.
|
|
1232 The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
|
|
1233 in the current directory first.
|
|
1234 If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
|
|
1235 a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
|
|
1236 override it: >
|
|
1237 :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
|
|
1238 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
1239 security reasons.
|
|
1240 (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
|
|
1241
|
|
1242 *'cedit'*
|
|
1243 'cedit' string (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)
|
|
1244 global
|
|
1245 {not in Vi}
|
|
1246 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
|
|
1247 feature}
|
|
1248 The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
|
|
1249 The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.
|
|
1250 Only non-printable keys are allowed.
|
|
1251 The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
|
|
1252 type. The preferred way is to use the <> notation. Examples: >
|
|
1253 :set cedit=<C-Y>
|
|
1254 :set cedit=<Esc>
|
|
1255 < |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
|
|
1256 See |cmdwin|.
|
|
1257
|
|
1258 *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
|
|
1259 'charconvert' 'ccv' string (default "")
|
|
1260 global
|
|
1261 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
1262 feature and the |+eval| feature}
|
|
1263 {not in Vi}
|
|
1264 An expression that is used for character encoding conversion. It is
|
|
1265 evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
|
|
1266 different encoding from what is desired.
|
|
1267 'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
|
|
1268 supported and is able to do the conversion. Using iconv() is
|
|
1269 preferred, because it is much faster.
|
|
1270 'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
|
|
1271 file to convert from. You will have to save the text in a file first.
|
|
1272 The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,
|
|
1273 non-zero for failure.
|
|
1274 The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.
|
|
1275 Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
|
|
1276 used.
|
|
1277 Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
|
|
1278 is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
|
|
1279 'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'
|
|
1280 flag is present in 'viminfo'. Also used for Unicode conversion.
|
|
1281 Example: >
|
|
1282 set charconvert=CharConvert()
|
|
1283 fun CharConvert()
|
|
1284 system("recode "
|
|
1285 \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to
|
|
1286 \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)
|
|
1287 return v:shell_error
|
|
1288 endfun
|
|
1289 < The related Vim variables are:
|
|
1290 v:charconvert_from name of the current encoding
|
|
1291 v:charconvert_to name of the desired encoding
|
|
1292 v:fname_in name of the input file
|
|
1293 v:fname_out name of the output file
|
|
1294 Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
|
|
1295 Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different
|
|
1296 from 'encoding'. Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.
|
|
1297 Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'. If you want
|
|
1298 to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care
|
|
1299 of this.
|
|
1300 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
1301 security reasons.
|
|
1302
|
|
1303 *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
|
|
1304 'cindent' 'cin' boolean (default off)
|
|
1305 local to buffer
|
|
1306 {not in Vi}
|
|
1307 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
1308 feature}
|
|
1309 Enables automatic C program indenting See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
|
|
1310 that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
|
|
1311 preferred indent style.
|
|
1312 If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
|
|
1313 If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
|
|
1314 the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
|
|
1315 external program.
|
|
1316 See |C-indenting|.
|
|
1317 When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
|
|
1318 option or 'indentexpr'.
|
|
1319 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
|
|
1320 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
1321
|
|
1322 *'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
|
|
1323 'cinkeys' 'cink' string (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
|
|
1324 local to buffer
|
|
1325 {not in Vi}
|
|
1326 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
1327 feature}
|
|
1328 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
|
|
1329 the current line. Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
|
|
1330 empty.
|
|
1331 For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
|
|
1332 See |C-indenting|.
|
|
1333
|
|
1334 *'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
|
|
1335 'cinoptions' 'cino' string (default "")
|
|
1336 local to buffer
|
|
1337 {not in Vi}
|
|
1338 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
1339 feature}
|
|
1340 The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
|
|
1341 program. See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
|
|
1342 |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
|
|
1343
|
|
1344
|
|
1345 *'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
|
|
1346 'cinwords' 'cinw' string (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
|
|
1347 local to buffer
|
|
1348 {not in Vi}
|
|
1349 {not available when compiled without both the
|
|
1350 |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features}
|
|
1351 These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
|
|
1352 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set. For 'cindent' this is only done at
|
|
1353 an appropriate place (inside {}).
|
|
1354 Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'. If case doesn't
|
|
1355 matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
|
|
1356 "if,If,IF".
|
|
1357
|
|
1358 *'clipboard'* *'cb'*
|
|
1359 'clipboard' 'cb' string (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"
|
|
1360 for X-windows, "" otherwise)
|
|
1361 global
|
|
1362 {not in Vi}
|
|
1363 {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard|
|
|
1364 feature is included}
|
|
1365 This option is a list of comma separated names.
|
|
1366 These names are recognized:
|
|
1367
|
|
1368 unnamed When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
|
|
1369 for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
|
|
1370 would normally go to the unnamed register. When a
|
|
1371 register is explicitly specified, it will always be
|
|
1372 used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
|
|
1373 or not. The clipboard register can always be
|
|
1374 explicitly accessed using the "* notation. Also see
|
|
1375 |gui-clipboard|.
|
|
1376
|
|
1377 autoselect Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
|
|
1378 then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
|
|
1379 area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
|
|
1380 windowing system's global selection or put the
|
|
1381 selected text on the clipboard used by the selection
|
|
1382 register "*. See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for
|
|
1383 details. When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in
|
|
1384 'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this
|
|
1385 "autoselect" flag is used.
|
|
1386 Also applies to the modeless selection.
|
|
1387
|
|
1388 autoselectml Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
|
|
1389 only. Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.
|
|
1390
|
|
1391 exclude:{pattern}
|
|
1392 Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
|
|
1393 the terminal 'term'. If there is a match, no
|
|
1394 connection will be made to the X server. This is
|
|
1395 useful in this situation:
|
|
1396 - Running Vim in a console.
|
|
1397 - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another
|
|
1398 display.
|
|
1399 - You do not want to connect to the X server in the
|
|
1400 console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.
|
|
1401 To never connect to the X server use: >
|
|
1402 exclude:.*
|
|
1403 < This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument.
|
|
1404 Note that when there is no connection to the X server
|
|
1405 the window title won't be restored and the clipboard
|
|
1406 cannot be accessed.
|
|
1407 The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is
|
|
1408 interpreted as if 'magic' was on.
|
|
1409 The rest of the option value will be used for
|
|
1410 {pattern}, this must be the last entry.
|
|
1411
|
|
1412 *'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
|
|
1413 'cmdheight' 'ch' number (default 1)
|
|
1414 global
|
|
1415 {not in Vi}
|
|
1416 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line. Helps avoiding
|
|
1417 |hit-enter| prompts.
|
|
1418
|
|
1419 *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
|
|
1420 'cmdwinheight' 'cwh' number (default 7)
|
|
1421 global
|
|
1422 {not in Vi}
|
|
1423 {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
|
|
1424 feature}
|
|
1425 Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
|
|
1426
|
|
1427 *'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
|
|
1428 'columns' 'co' number (default 80 or terminal width)
|
|
1429 global
|
|
1430 {not in Vi}
|
|
1431 Number of columns of the screen. Normally this is set by the terminal
|
161
|
1432 initialization and does not have to be set by hand. Also see
|
|
1433 |posix-screen-size|.
|
7
|
1434 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
|
|
1435 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
|
|
1436 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
|
|
1437 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
|
|
1438 number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.
|
571
|
1439 Mimimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000.
|
7
|
1440
|
|
1441 *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
|
|
1442 'comments' 'com' string (default
|
|
1443 "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")
|
|
1444 local to buffer
|
|
1445 {not in Vi}
|
|
1446 {not available when compiled without the |+comments|
|
|
1447 feature}
|
|
1448 A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line. See
|
|
1449 |format-comments|. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
|
|
1450 insert a space.
|
|
1451
|
|
1452 *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
|
|
1453 'commentstring' 'cms' string (default "/*%s*/")
|
|
1454 local to buffer
|
|
1455 {not in Vi}
|
|
1456 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
1457 feature}
|
|
1458 A template for a comment. The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
|
|
1459 comment text. Currently only used to add markers for folding, see
|
|
1460 |fold-marker|.
|
|
1461
|
|
1462 *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
|
378
|
1463 'compatible' 'cp' boolean (default on, off when a .vimrc or .gvimrc file
|
|
1464 is found)
|
7
|
1465 global
|
|
1466 {not in Vi}
|
|
1467 This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
|
|
1468 make Vim behave in a more useful way.
|
|
1469 This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,
|
|
1470 other options are also changed as a side effect. CAREFUL: Setting or
|
|
1471 resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings
|
10
|
1472 are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc. If you
|
7
|
1473 set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the
|
|
1474 very start.
|
|
1475 By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the
|
|
1476 options. This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
|
|
1477 just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
|
|
1478 option.
|
378
|
1479 When a ".vimrc" or ".gvimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up,
|
|
1480 this option is switched off, and all options that have not been
|
|
1481 modified will be set to the Vim defaults. Effectively, this means
|
|
1482 that when a ".vimrc" or ".gvimrc" file exists, Vim will use the Vim
|
|
1483 defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults. (Note: This doesn't
|
|
1484 happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file). Also see
|
|
1485 |compatible-default| and |posix-compliance|.
|
7
|
1486 You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
|
|
1487 "-N". See |-C| and |-N|.
|
|
1488 Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
|
|
1489 that have a different Vi and Vim default value. See the options
|
|
1490 marked with a '+' below. Other options are not modified.
|
|
1491 At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set
|
|
1492 or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible. See the table
|
10
|
1493 below. This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible
|
7
|
1494 editing.
|
|
1495 See also 'cpoptions'.
|
|
1496
|
|
1497 option + set value effect ~
|
|
1498
|
|
1499 'allowrevins' off no CTRL-_ command
|
|
1500 'backupcopy' Unix: "yes" backup file is a copy
|
|
1501 others: "auto" copy or rename backup file
|
|
1502 'backspace' "" normal backspace
|
|
1503 'backup' off no backup file
|
|
1504 'cindent' off no C code indentation
|
|
1505 'cedit' + "" no key to open the |cmdwin|
|
|
1506 'cpoptions' + (all flags) Vi-compatible flags
|
|
1507 'cscopetag' off don't use cscope for ":tag"
|
|
1508 'cscopetagorder' 0 see |cscopetagorder|
|
|
1509 'cscopeverbose' off see |cscopeverbose|
|
|
1510 'digraph' off no digraphs
|
|
1511 'esckeys' + off no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode
|
|
1512 'expandtab' off tabs not expanded to spaces
|
|
1513 'fileformats' + "" no automatic file format detection,
|
|
1514 "dos,unix" except for DOS, Windows and OS/2
|
|
1515 'formatoptions' + "vt" Vi compatible formatting
|
|
1516 'gdefault' off no default 'g' flag for ":s"
|
|
1517 'history' + 0 no commandline history
|
|
1518 'hkmap' off no Hebrew keyboard mapping
|
|
1519 'hkmapp' off no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
|
|
1520 'hlsearch' off no highlighting of search matches
|
|
1521 'incsearch' off no incremental searching
|
|
1522 'indentexpr' "" no indenting by expression
|
|
1523 'insertmode' off do not start in Insert mode
|
|
1524 'iskeyword' + "@,48-57,_" keywords contain alphanumeric
|
|
1525 characters and '_'
|
|
1526 'joinspaces' on insert 2 spaces after period
|
|
1527 'modeline' + off no modelines
|
|
1528 'more' + off no pauses in listings
|
|
1529 'revins' off no reverse insert
|
|
1530 'ruler' off no ruler
|
|
1531 'scrolljump' 1 no jump scroll
|
|
1532 'scrolloff' 0 no scroll offset
|
|
1533 'shiftround' off indent not rounded to shiftwidth
|
|
1534 'shortmess' + "" no shortening of messages
|
|
1535 'showcmd' + off command characters not shown
|
|
1536 'showmode' + off current mode not shown
|
|
1537 'smartcase' off no automatic ignore case switch
|
|
1538 'smartindent' off no smart indentation
|
|
1539 'smarttab' off no smart tab size
|
|
1540 'softtabstop' 0 tabs are always 'tabstop' positions
|
|
1541 'startofline' on goto startofline with some commands
|
|
1542 'tagrelative' + off tag file names are not relative
|
|
1543 'textauto' + off no automatic textmode detection
|
|
1544 'textwidth' 0 no automatic line wrap
|
|
1545 'tildeop' off tilde is not an operator
|
|
1546 'ttimeout' off no terminal timeout
|
|
1547 'whichwrap' + "" left-right movements don't wrap
|
|
1548 'wildchar' + CTRL-E only when the current value is <Tab>
|
|
1549 use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
|
|
1550 'writebackup' on or off depends on +writebackup feature
|
|
1551
|
|
1552 *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
|
|
1553 'complete' 'cpt' string (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
|
|
1554 local to buffer
|
|
1555 {not in Vi}
|
|
1556 This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
|
|
1557 when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used. It is also used for whole-line
|
|
1558 completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|. It indicates the type of completion
|
|
1559 and the places to scan. It is a comma separated list of flags:
|
|
1560 . scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
|
|
1561 w scan buffers from other windows
|
|
1562 b scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
|
|
1563 u scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
|
|
1564 U scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
|
|
1565 k scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
|
|
1566 k{dict} scan the file {dict}. Several "k" flags can be given,
|
|
1567 patterns are valid too. For example: >
|
|
1568 :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
|
|
1569 < s scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
|
|
1570 s{tsr} scan the file {tsr}. Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
|
|
1571 are valid too.
|
|
1572 i scan current and included files
|
|
1573 d scan current and included files for defined name or macro
|
|
1574 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
|
|
1575 ] tag completion
|
|
1576 t same as "]"
|
|
1577
|
|
1578 Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
|
|
1579 not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
|
|
1580 (gzipped files for example). Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
|
|
1581 whole-line completion.
|
|
1582
|
|
1583 The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:
|
|
1584 1. the current buffer
|
|
1585 2. buffers in other windows
|
|
1586 3. other loaded buffers
|
|
1587 4. unloaded buffers
|
|
1588 5. tags
|
|
1589 6. included files
|
|
1590
|
|
1591 As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
|
233
|
1592 based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
|
|
1593 |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions).
|
7
|
1594
|
12
|
1595 *'completefunc'* *'cfu'*
|
|
1596 'completefunc' 'cfu' string (default: empty)
|
|
1597 local to buffer
|
|
1598 {not in Vi}
|
452
|
1599 {not available when compiled without the +eval
|
|
1600 or +insert_expand feature}
|
|
1601 This option specifies a function to be used for CTRL-X CTRL-U
|
|
1602 completion. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
|
|
1603
|
502
|
1604 The function will be invoked with two arguments. First the function
|
|
1605 is called to find the start of the text to be completed. Secondly the
|
|
1606 function is called to actually find the matches.
|
|
1607
|
|
1608 On the first invocation the arguments are:
|
|
1609 a:findstart 1
|
|
1610 a:base empty
|
|
1611
|
|
1612 The function must return the column of where the completion starts.
|
|
1613 It must be a number between zero and the cursor column "col('.')".
|
|
1614 This involves looking at the characters just before the cursor and
|
|
1615 including those characters that could be part of the completed item.
|
|
1616 The text between this column and the cursor column will be replaced
|
|
1617 with the matches. Return -1 if no completion can be done.
|
|
1618
|
|
1619 On the second invocation the arguments are:
|
|
1620 a:findstart 0
|
|
1621 a:base the text with which matches should match, what was
|
548
|
1622 located in the first call (can be empty)
|
502
|
1623
|
|
1624 The function must return a List with the matching words. These
|
|
1625 matches usually include the "a:base" text. When there are no matches
|
|
1626 return an empty List.
|
452
|
1627
|
464
|
1628 When searching for matches takes some time call |complete_add()| to
|
|
1629 add each match to the total list. These matches should then not
|
|
1630 appear in the returned list! Call |complete_check()| now and then to
|
|
1631 allow the user to press a key while still searching for matches. Stop
|
|
1632 searching when it returns non-zero.
|
|
1633
|
502
|
1634 The function may move the cursor, it is restored afterwards.
|
464
|
1635 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
1636 security reasons.
|
452
|
1637
|
12
|
1638 An example that completes the names of the months: >
|
502
|
1639 fun! CompleteMonths(findstart, base)
|
12
|
1640 if a:findstart
|
452
|
1641 " locate the start of the word
|
|
1642 let line = getline('.')
|
502
|
1643 let start = col('.') - 1
|
452
|
1644 while start > 0 && line[start - 1] =~ '\a'
|
|
1645 let start -= 1
|
12
|
1646 endwhile
|
|
1647 return start
|
|
1648 else
|
|
1649 " find months matching with "a:base"
|
452
|
1650 let res = []
|
|
1651 for m in split("Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec")
|
|
1652 if m =~ '^' . a:base
|
|
1653 call add(res, m)
|
|
1654 endif
|
|
1655 endfor
|
12
|
1656 return res
|
|
1657 endif
|
|
1658 endfun
|
|
1659 set completefunc=CompleteMonths
|
452
|
1660 <
|
464
|
1661 The same, but now pretending searching for matches is slow: >
|
502
|
1662 fun! CompleteMonths(findstart, base)
|
464
|
1663 if a:findstart
|
|
1664 " locate the start of the word
|
|
1665 let line = getline('.')
|
502
|
1666 let start = col('.') - 1
|
464
|
1667 while start > 0 && line[start - 1] =~ '\a'
|
|
1668 let start -= 1
|
|
1669 endwhile
|
|
1670 return start
|
|
1671 else
|
|
1672 " find months matching with "a:base"
|
|
1673 for m in split("Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec")
|
|
1674 if m =~ '^' . a:base
|
|
1675 call complete_add(m)
|
|
1676 endif
|
|
1677 sleep 300m " simulate searching for next match
|
|
1678 if complete_check()
|
|
1679 break
|
|
1680 endif
|
|
1681 endfor
|
|
1682 return []
|
|
1683 endif
|
|
1684 endfun
|
|
1685 set completefunc=CompleteMonths
|
|
1686 <
|
14
|
1687
|
540
|
1688 *'completeopt'* *'cot'*
|
|
1689 'completeopt' 'cot' string (default: "menu")
|
|
1690 global
|
|
1691 {not in Vi}
|
|
1692 Options for Insert mode completion |ins-completion|.
|
|
1693 Currently the only supported value is:
|
|
1694
|
|
1695 menu Use a popup menu to show the possible completions. The
|
|
1696 menu is only shown when there is more than one match and
|
|
1697 sufficient colors are available. |ins-completion-menu|
|
|
1698
|
|
1699
|
7
|
1700 *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
|
|
1701 'confirm' 'cf' boolean (default off)
|
|
1702 global
|
|
1703 {not in Vi}
|
|
1704 When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
|
|
1705 fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
|
|
1706 instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current
|
|
1707 file(s). You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
|
|
1708 If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
|
|
1709 command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
|
|
1710 command.
|
|
1711 Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
|
|
1712
|
|
1713 *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'*
|
|
1714 'conskey' 'consk' boolean (default off)
|
|
1715 global
|
|
1716 {not in Vi} {only for MS-DOS}
|
|
1717 When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
|
10
|
1718 This should work in most cases. Also see |'bioskey'|. Together,
|
7
|
1719 three methods of console input are available:
|
|
1720 'conskey' 'bioskey' action ~
|
|
1721 on on or off direct console input
|
|
1722 off on BIOS
|
|
1723 off off STDIN
|
|
1724
|
|
1725 *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
|
|
1726 'copyindent' 'ci' boolean (default off)
|
|
1727 local to buffer
|
|
1728 {not in Vi}
|
|
1729 Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
|
|
1730 new line. Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
|
|
1731 tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
|
|
1732 in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option makes the
|
|
1733 new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
|
|
1734 existing line. If the new indent is greater than on the existing
|
|
1735 line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
|
|
1736 NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
1737 Also see 'preserveindent'.
|
|
1738
|
|
1739 *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
|
|
1740 'cpoptions' 'cpo' string (Vim default: "aABceFs",
|
|
1741 Vi default: all flags)
|
|
1742 global
|
|
1743 {not in Vi}
|
|
1744 A sequence of single character flags. When a character is present
|
10
|
1745 this indicates vi-compatible behavior. This is used for things where
|
7
|
1746 not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
|
|
1747 'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
|
|
1748 Commas can be added for readability.
|
|
1749 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
|
1750 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
|
1751 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
1752 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
164
|
1753 NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when
|
|
1754 the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment
|
|
1755 variable exists |posix|. This means tries to behave like the POSIX
|
|
1756 specification.
|
7
|
1757
|
|
1758 contains behavior ~
|
|
1759 *cpo-a*
|
|
1760 a When included, a ":read" command with a file name
|
|
1761 argument will set the alternate file name for the
|
|
1762 current window.
|
|
1763 *cpo-A*
|
|
1764 A When included, a ":write" command with a file name
|
|
1765 argument will set the alternate file name for the
|
|
1766 current window.
|
|
1767 *cpo-b*
|
|
1768 b "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
|
|
1769 the map command. The '\' is included in the mapping,
|
|
1770 the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
|
|
1771 command. Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
|
|
1772 include the '|' in the mapping. Applies to all
|
|
1773 mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
|
|
1774 See also |map_bar|.
|
|
1775 *cpo-B*
|
|
1776 B A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
|
|
1777 abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.
|
|
1778 Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a
|
|
1779 CTRL-V. For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"
|
|
1780 results in X being mapped to:
|
|
1781 'B' included: "\^[" (^[ is a real <Esc>)
|
|
1782 'B' excluded: "<Esc>" (5 characters)
|
|
1783 ('<' excluded in both cases)
|
|
1784 *cpo-c*
|
|
1785 c Searching continues at the end of any match at the
|
|
1786 cursor position, but not further than the start of the
|
|
1787 next line. When not present searching continues
|
|
1788 one character from the cursor position. With 'c'
|
|
1789 "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
|
|
1790 "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
|
|
1791 *cpo-C*
|
|
1792 C Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
|
|
1793 backslash. See |line-continuation|.
|
|
1794 *cpo-d*
|
|
1795 d Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
|
|
1796 the tags file relative to the current file, but the
|
|
1797 tags file in the current directory.
|
|
1798 *cpo-D*
|
|
1799 D Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
|
|
1800 commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
|
|
1801 |t|.
|
|
1802 *cpo-e*
|
|
1803 e When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
|
|
1804 <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
|
|
1805 linewise. If this flag is not present, the register
|
|
1806 is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
|
|
1807 <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
|
|
1808 and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
|
|
1809 *cpo-E*
|
|
1810 E It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
|
|
1811 "gU" on an Empty region. The operators only work when
|
|
1812 at least one character is to be operate on. Example:
|
|
1813 This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
|
|
1814 *cpo-f*
|
|
1815 f When included, a ":read" command with a file name
|
|
1816 argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
|
|
1817 if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
|
|
1818 *cpo-F*
|
|
1819 F When included, a ":write" command with a file name
|
|
1820 argument will set the file name for the current
|
|
1821 buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
|
590
|
1822 yet. Also see |cpo-P|.
|
7
|
1823 *cpo-g*
|
|
1824 g Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.
|
164
|
1825 *cpo-H*
|
|
1826 H When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert
|
|
1827 before the last blank. Without this flag insert after
|
|
1828 the last blank.
|
7
|
1829 *cpo-i*
|
|
1830 i When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
|
|
1831 leave it modified.
|
10
|
1832 *cpo-I*
|
|
1833 I When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
|
|
1834 indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
|
7
|
1835 *cpo-j*
|
|
1836 j When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',
|
|
1837 not after '!' or '?'. Also see 'joinspaces'.
|
|
1838 *cpo-J*
|
|
1839 J A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
|
233
|
1840 the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as
|
7
|
1841 white space.
|
|
1842 *cpo-k*
|
|
1843 k Disable the recognition of raw key codes in
|
|
1844 mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu
|
|
1845 commands. For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[
|
|
1846 is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X
|
|
1847 being mapped to:
|
|
1848 'k' included: "^[OA" (3 characters)
|
|
1849 'k' excluded: "<Key>" (one key code)
|
|
1850 Also see the '<' flag below.
|
|
1851 *cpo-K*
|
|
1852 K Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
|
|
1853 halfway a mapping. This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when
|
|
1854 only part of the second <F1> has been read. It
|
|
1855 enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.
|
|
1856 *cpo-l*
|
|
1857 l Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
|
168
|
1858 literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.
|
|
1859 See |/[]|
|
7
|
1860 'l' included: "/[ \t]" finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
|
|
1861 'l' excluded: "/[ \t]" finds <Space> and <Tab>
|
168
|
1862 Also see |cpo-\|.
|
7
|
1863 *cpo-L*
|
|
1864 L When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
|
|
1865 'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
|
|
1866 (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
|
|
1867 the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
|
|
1868 *cpo-m*
|
|
1869 m When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
|
|
1870 second. When not included, a showmatch will wait half
|
|
1871 a second or until a character is typed. |'showmatch'|
|
|
1872 *cpo-M*
|
|
1873 M When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
|
|
1874 account. Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
|
|
1875 parenthesis match. When included "%" ignores
|
|
1876 backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
|
|
1877 *cpo-n*
|
|
1878 n When included, the column used for 'number' will also
|
|
1879 be used for text of wrapped lines.
|
|
1880 *cpo-o*
|
|
1881 o Line offset to search command is not remembered for
|
|
1882 next search.
|
|
1883 *cpo-O*
|
|
1884 O Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
|
|
1885 when it didn't exist when editing it. This is a
|
|
1886 protection against a file unexpectedly created by
|
|
1887 someone else. Vi didn't complain about this.
|
|
1888 *cpo-p*
|
|
1889 p Vi compatible Lisp indenting. When not present, a
|
|
1890 slightly better algorithm is used.
|
590
|
1891 *cpo-P*
|
|
1892 P When included, a ":write" command that appends to a
|
|
1893 file will set the file name for the current buffer, if
|
|
1894 the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and
|
|
1895 the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|.
|
164
|
1896 *cpo-q*
|
|
1897 q When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the
|
|
1898 position where it would be when joining two lines.
|
7
|
1899 *cpo-r*
|
|
1900 r Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
|
|
1901 command, instead of the actually used search string.
|
|
1902 *cpo-R*
|
|
1903 R Remove marks from filtered lines. Without this flag
|
|
1904 marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
|
|
1905 *cpo-s*
|
|
1906 s Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
|
|
1907 first time. This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
|
10
|
1908 And it is the default. If not present the options are
|
7
|
1909 set when the buffer is created.
|
|
1910 *cpo-S*
|
|
1911 S Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
|
|
1912 (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
|
|
1913 'syntax'). This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
|
|
1914 The options are set to the values in the current
|
|
1915 buffer. When you change an option and go to another
|
|
1916 buffer, the value is copied. Effectively makes the
|
|
1917 buffer options global to all buffers.
|
|
1918
|
|
1919 's' 'S' copy buffer options
|
|
1920 no no when buffer created
|
|
1921 yes no when buffer first entered (default)
|
|
1922 X yes each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
|
|
1923 *cpo-t*
|
|
1924 t Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
|
|
1925 "n" command. Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
|
|
1926 the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
|
|
1927 last used search pattern.
|
|
1928 *cpo-u*
|
10
|
1929 u Undo is Vi compatible. See |undo-two-ways|.
|
7
|
1930 *cpo-v*
|
|
1931 v Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
|
|
1932 Insert mode. Without this flag the characters are
|
|
1933 erased from the screen right away. With this flag the
|
|
1934 screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
|
|
1935 characters.
|
|
1936 *cpo-w*
|
|
1937 w When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one
|
|
1938 character and not all blanks until the start of the
|
|
1939 next word.
|
|
1940 *cpo-W*
|
|
1941 W Don't overwrite a readonly file. When omitted, ":w!"
|
|
1942 overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
|
|
1943 *cpo-x*
|
|
1944 x <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
|
|
1945 The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
|
|
1946 because <Esc> normally aborts a command. |c_<Esc>|
|
164
|
1947 *cpo-X*
|
|
1948 X When using a count with "R" the replaced text is
|
|
1949 deleted only once. Also when repeating "R" with "."
|
|
1950 and a count.
|
7
|
1951 *cpo-y*
|
|
1952 y A yank command can be redone with ".".
|
164
|
1953 *cpo-Z*
|
|
1954 Z When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,
|
|
1955 don't reset 'readonly'.
|
7
|
1956 *cpo-!*
|
|
1957 ! When redoing a filter command, use the last used
|
|
1958 external command, whatever it was. Otherwise the last
|
|
1959 used -filter- command is used.
|
|
1960 *cpo-$*
|
|
1961 $ When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
|
|
1962 line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
|
|
1963 The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
|
|
1964 new text. The line is redisplayed if you type any
|
|
1965 command that moves the cursor from the insertion
|
|
1966 point.
|
|
1967 *cpo-%*
|
|
1968 % Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
|
|
1969 Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
|
|
1970 Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
|
|
1971 Parens inside single and double quotes are also
|
|
1972 counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
|
|
1973 disturb the matching. For example, in a line like
|
|
1974 "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
|
|
1975 match the last one. When this flag is not included,
|
|
1976 parens inside single and double quotes are treated
|
|
1977 specially. When matching a paren outside of quotes,
|
|
1978 everything inside quotes is ignored. When matching a
|
|
1979 paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
|
10
|
1980 there is one). This works very well for C programs.
|
36
|
1981 This flag is also used for other features, such as
|
|
1982 C-indenting.
|
161
|
1983 *cpo--*
|
|
1984 - When included, a vertical movement command fails when
|
|
1985 it would above the first line or below the last line.
|
|
1986 Without it the cursor moves to the first or last line,
|
|
1987 unless it already was in that line.
|
|
1988 Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j",
|
|
1989 CTRL-N and CTRL-J.
|
39
|
1990 *cpo-+*
|
|
1991 + When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
|
|
1992 'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
|
|
1993 itself may still be different from its file.
|
164
|
1994 *cpo-star*
|
7
|
1995 * Use ":*" in the same way as ":@". When not included,
|
|
1996 ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
|
|
1997 *cpo-<*
|
|
1998 < Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>|
|
|
1999 form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of
|
10
|
2000 menu commands. For example, the command
|
7
|
2001 ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:
|
|
2002 '<' included: "<Tab>" (5 characters)
|
|
2003 '<' excluded: "^I" (^I is a real <Tab>)
|
|
2004 Also see the 'k' flag above.
|
164
|
2005 *cpo->*
|
|
2006 > When appending to a register, put a line break before
|
|
2007 the appended text.
|
|
2008
|
|
2009 POSIX flags. These are not included in the Vi default value, except
|
|
2010 when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix|
|
|
2011
|
|
2012 contains behavior ~
|
|
2013 *cpo-#*
|
|
2014 # A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect.
|
168
|
2015 *cpo-&*
|
|
2016 & When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when
|
|
2017 exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded.
|
|
2018 This flag is tested when exiting.
|
|
2019 *cpo-\*
|
|
2020 \ Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
|
|
2021 literally, only "\]" is special See |/[]|
|
488
|
2022 '\' included: "/[ \-]" finds <Space>, '\' and '-'
|
|
2023 '\' excluded: "/[ \-]" finds <Space> and '-'
|
|
2024 Also see |cpo-l|.
|
168
|
2025 *cpo-/*
|
|
2026 / When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s|
|
|
2027 command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%|
|
164
|
2028 *cpo-{*
|
|
2029 { The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character
|
|
2030 at the start of a line.
|
168
|
2031 *cpo-.*
|
|
2032 . The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current
|
|
2033 buffer is modified, unless ! is used. Vim doesn't
|
|
2034 need this, since it remembers the full path of an
|
|
2035 opened file.
|
164
|
2036 *cpo-bar*
|
|
2037 | The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment
|
|
2038 variables overrule the terminal size values obtained
|
|
2039 with system specific functions.
|
|
2040
|
7
|
2041
|
|
2042 *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
|
|
2043 'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number (default 0)
|
|
2044 global
|
|
2045 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
2046 feature}
|
|
2047 {not in Vi}
|
|
2048 Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.
|
|
2049 See |cscopepathcomp|.
|
|
2050
|
|
2051 *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'*
|
|
2052 'cscopeprg' 'csprg' string (default "cscope")
|
|
2053 global
|
|
2054 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
2055 feature}
|
|
2056 {not in Vi}
|
|
2057 Specifies the command to execute cscope. See |cscopeprg|.
|
|
2058 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
2059 security reasons.
|
|
2060
|
|
2061 *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'*
|
|
2062 'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string (default "")
|
|
2063 global
|
|
2064 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
2065 or |+quickfix| features}
|
|
2066 {not in Vi}
|
|
2067 Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
|
|
2068 See |cscopequickfix|.
|
|
2069
|
|
2070 *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'*
|
|
2071 'cscopetag' 'cst' boolean (default off)
|
|
2072 global
|
|
2073 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
2074 feature}
|
|
2075 {not in Vi}
|
|
2076 Use cscope for tag commands. See |cscope-options|.
|
|
2077 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
2078
|
|
2079 *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'*
|
|
2080 'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number (default 0)
|
|
2081 global
|
|
2082 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
2083 feature}
|
|
2084 {not in Vi}
|
|
2085 Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search. See
|
|
2086 |cscopetagorder|.
|
|
2087 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
2088
|
|
2089 *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'*
|
|
2090 *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'*
|
|
2091 'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)
|
|
2092 global
|
|
2093 {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
|
|
2094 feature}
|
|
2095 {not in Vi}
|
|
2096 Give messages when adding a cscope database. See |cscopeverbose|.
|
|
2097 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
2098
|
|
2099 *'debug'*
|
|
2100 'debug' string (default "")
|
|
2101 global
|
|
2102 {not in Vi}
|
|
2103 When set to "msg", error messages that would otherwise be omitted will
|
|
2104 be given anyway. This is useful when debugging 'foldexpr' or
|
|
2105 'indentexpr'.
|
168
|
2106 When set to "beep", a message will be given when otherwise only a beep
|
|
2107 would be produced.
|
|
2108 The values can be combined, separated by a comma.
|
7
|
2109
|
|
2110 *'define'* *'def'*
|
|
2111 'define' 'def' string (default "^\s*#\s*define")
|
|
2112 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
2113 {not in Vi}
|
10
|
2114 Pattern to be used to find a macro definition. It is a search
|
7
|
2115 pattern, just like for the "/" command. This option is used for the
|
|
2116 commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|. The 'isident' option is
|
|
2117 used to recognize the defined name after the match:
|
|
2118 {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
|
|
2119 See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
|
|
2120 or backslash.
|
|
2121 The default value is for C programs. For C++ this value would be
|
|
2122 useful, to include const type declarations: >
|
|
2123 ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
|
|
2124 < When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
|
|
2125
|
|
2126 *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'*
|
|
2127 'delcombine' 'deco' boolean (default off)
|
|
2128 global
|
|
2129 {not in Vi}
|
|
2130 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
2131 feature}
|
|
2132 If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
|
|
2133 "x" delete each combining character on its own. When it is off (the
|
|
2134 default) the character along with its combining characters are
|
|
2135 deleted.
|
|
2136 Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!
|
|
2137
|
|
2138 This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
|
|
2139 may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
|
|
2140 to remove only the combining ones.
|
|
2141
|
|
2142 *'dictionary'* *'dict'*
|
|
2143 'dictionary' 'dict' string (default "")
|
|
2144 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
2145 {not in Vi}
|
|
2146 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
|
|
2147 for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|. Each file should
|
|
2148 contain a list of words. This can be one word per line, or several
|
|
2149 words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
|
|
2150 preferred). Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
|
10
|
2151 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
|
7
|
2152 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
|
|
2153 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
|
99
|
2154 This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
|
7
|
2155 Where to find a list of words?
|
|
2156 - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
|
|
2157 - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
|
|
2158 - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.
|
|
2159 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
2160 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
2161 uses another default.
|
|
2162 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
|
|
2163
|
|
2164 *'diff'* *'nodiff'*
|
|
2165 'diff' boolean (default off)
|
|
2166 local to window
|
|
2167 {not in Vi}
|
|
2168 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
2169 feature}
|
|
2170 Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
|
10
|
2171 between files. See |vimdiff|.
|
7
|
2172
|
|
2173 *'dex'* *'diffexpr'*
|
|
2174 'diffexpr' 'dex' string (default "")
|
|
2175 global
|
|
2176 {not in Vi}
|
|
2177 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
2178 feature}
|
|
2179 Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two
|
|
2180 versions of a file. See |diff-diffexpr|.
|
|
2181 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
2182 security reasons.
|
|
2183
|
|
2184 *'dip'* *'diffopt'*
|
|
2185 'diffopt' 'dip' string (default "filler")
|
|
2186 global
|
|
2187 {not in Vi}
|
|
2188 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
2189 feature}
|
10
|
2190 Option settings for diff mode. It can consist of the following items.
|
7
|
2191 All are optional. Items must be separated by a comma.
|
|
2192
|
|
2193 filler Show filler lines, to keep the text
|
|
2194 synchronized with a window that has inserted
|
|
2195 lines at the same position. Mostly useful
|
|
2196 when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
|
|
2197 is set.
|
|
2198
|
|
2199 context:{n} Use a context of {n} lines between a change
|
|
2200 and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
|
|
2201 When omitted a context of six lines is used.
|
|
2202 See |fold-diff|.
|
|
2203
|
|
2204 icase Ignore changes in case of text. "a" and "A"
|
|
2205 are considered the same. Adds the "-i" flag
|
|
2206 to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.
|
|
2207
|
|
2208 iwhite Ignore changes in amount of white space. Adds
|
|
2209 the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
|
|
2210 'diffexpr' is empty. Check the documentation
|
|
2211 of the "diff" command for what this does
|
|
2212 exactly. It should ignore adding trailing
|
|
2213 white space, but not leading white space.
|
|
2214
|
|
2215 Examples: >
|
|
2216
|
|
2217 :set diffopt=filler,context:4
|
|
2218 :set diffopt=
|
|
2219 :set diffopt=filler
|
|
2220 <
|
|
2221 *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
|
|
2222 'digraph' 'dg' boolean (default off)
|
|
2223 global
|
|
2224 {not in Vi}
|
|
2225 {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs|
|
|
2226 feature}
|
|
2227 Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
|
|
2228 {char2}. See |digraphs|.
|
|
2229 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
2230
|
|
2231 *'directory'* *'dir'*
|
|
2232 'directory' 'dir' string (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
|
|
2233 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp"
|
|
2234 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")
|
|
2235 global
|
|
2236 List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
|
|
2237 - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
|
|
2238 possible.
|
|
2239 - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
|
|
2240 impossible!).
|
|
2241 - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
|
|
2242 the edited file. On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
|
|
2243 it doesn't show in a directory listing. On MS-Windows the "hidden"
|
|
2244 attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
|
33
|
2245 - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
|
7
|
2246 put the swap file relative to where the edited file is. The leading
|
|
2247 "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
|
459
|
2248 - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//"
|
|
2249 or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to
|
|
2250 the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs.
|
|
2251 This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
|
7
|
2252 - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
|
|
2253 of the directory name. To have a space at the start of a directory
|
|
2254 name, precede it with a backslash.
|
|
2255 - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
|
|
2256 - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
|
|
2257 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
2258 - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
|
|
2259 get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
|
|
2260 :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
|
|
2261 < - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
|
|
2262 of the option is removed.
|
|
2263 Using "." first in the list is recommended. This means that editing
|
|
2264 the same file twice will result in a warning. Using "/tmp" on Unix is
|
|
2265 discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.
|
|
2266 "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better
|
|
2267 choice than "/tmp". But it can contain a lot of files, your swap
|
|
2268 files get lost in the crowd. That is why a "tmp" directory in your
|
|
2269 home directory is tried first.
|
|
2270 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
2271 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
2272 uses another default.
|
|
2273 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
2274 security reasons.
|
|
2275 {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}
|
|
2276
|
|
2277 *'display'* *'dy'*
|
|
2278 'display' 'dy' string (default "")
|
|
2279 global
|
|
2280 {not in Vi}
|
|
2281 Change the way text is displayed. This is comma separated list of
|
|
2282 flags:
|
|
2283 lastline When included, as much as possible of the last line
|
10
|
2284 in a window will be displayed. When not included, a
|
7
|
2285 last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
|
|
2286 uhex Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
|
|
2287 instead of using ^C and ~C.
|
|
2288
|
|
2289 *'eadirection'* *'ead'*
|
|
2290 'eadirection' 'ead' string (default "both")
|
|
2291 global
|
|
2292 {not in Vi}
|
|
2293 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
2294 feature}
|
|
2295 Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
|
|
2296 ver vertically, width of windows is not affected
|
|
2297 hor horizontally, height of windows is not affected
|
|
2298 both width and height of windows is affected
|
|
2299
|
|
2300 *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'*
|
|
2301 'edcompatible' 'ed' boolean (default off)
|
|
2302 global
|
|
2303 Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be
|
|
2304 toggled each time the flag is given. See |complex-change|. See
|
|
2305 also 'gdefault' option.
|
|
2306 Switching this option on is discouraged!
|
|
2307
|
|
2308 *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
|
|
2309 'encoding' 'enc' string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
|
|
2310 global
|
|
2311 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
2312 feature}
|
|
2313 {not in Vi}
|
|
2314 Sets the character encoding used inside Vim. It applies to text in
|
|
2315 the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the
|
|
2316 viminfo file, etc. It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work
|
|
2317 with. See |encoding-names| for the possible values.
|
|
2318
|
|
2319 NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
|
39
|
2320 existing text in Vim. It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid.
|
7
|
2321 It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
|
|
2322 starts up. See |multibyte|.
|
|
2323
|
|
2324 NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
|
|
2325 "utf-8". Although care has been taken to allow different values of
|
|
2326 'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
|
|
2327 avoids unnecessary conversion overhead. "utf-8" has not been made
|
10
|
2328 the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal
|
7
|
2329 versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files
|
|
2330 without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).
|
|
2331
|
|
2332 The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.
|
10
|
2333 This is specified with 'fileencoding'. The conversion is done with
|
7
|
2334 iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.
|
|
2335
|
|
2336 Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale. This will
|
|
2337 be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings. If
|
|
2338 'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be
|
|
2339 set to convert typed and displayed text. See |encoding-table|.
|
|
2340
|
|
2341 When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand
|
|
2342 event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.
|
|
2343
|
|
2344 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
|
|
2345 you can set it with uppercase values too. Underscores are translated
|
|
2346 to '-' signs.
|
|
2347 When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.
|
|
2348 For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes
|
|
2349 "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".
|
|
2350
|
|
2351 Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.
|
|
2352 This only works when editing files in the same encoding! When the
|
|
2353 actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and
|
|
2354 'fileencodings' are empty. When conversion is needed, switch to using
|
|
2355 utf-8.
|
|
2356
|
|
2357 When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.
|
|
2358 You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the
|
|
2359 |viminfo-file|. And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too. Thus
|
|
2360 setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
|
|
2361 effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.
|
448
|
2362
|
|
2363 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
|
|
2364 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
|
7
|
2365
|
|
2366 *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
|
|
2367 'endofline' 'eol' boolean (default on)
|
|
2368 local to buffer
|
|
2369 {not in Vi}
|
|
2370 When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
|
10
|
2371 is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file. This
|
7
|
2372 option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
|
|
2373 the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
|
|
2374 which case it is reset. Normally you don't have to set or reset this
|
|
2375 option. When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
|
|
2376 file. When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
|
|
2377 <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
|
|
2378 the situation from the original file can be kept. But you can change
|
|
2379 it if you want to.
|
|
2380
|
|
2381 *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
|
|
2382 'equalalways' 'ea' boolean (default on)
|
|
2383 global
|
|
2384 {not in Vi}
|
|
2385 When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
|
33
|
2386 splitting or closing a window. This also happens the moment the
|
|
2387 option is switched on. When off, splitting a window will reduce the
|
|
2388 size of the current window and leave the other windows the same. When
|
|
2389 closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
|
|
2390 (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
|
7
|
2391 When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
|
|
2392 is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room. The
|
|
2393 'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
|
|
2394 Changing the height of a window can be avoided by setting
|
|
2395 'winfixheight'.
|
|
2396
|
|
2397 *'equalprg'* *'ep'*
|
|
2398 'equalprg' 'ep' string (default "")
|
|
2399 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
2400 {not in Vi}
|
|
2401 External program to use for "=" command. When this option is empty
|
|
2402 the internal formatting functions are used ('lisp', 'cindent' or
|
|
2403 'indentexpr').
|
10
|
2404 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash|
|
7
|
2405 about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
2406 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
2407 security reasons.
|
|
2408
|
|
2409 *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
|
|
2410 'errorbells' 'eb' boolean (default off)
|
|
2411 global
|
|
2412 Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages. This only
|
|
2413 makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
|
|
2414 for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
|
10
|
2415 mode). See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
|
7
|
2416 screen flash or do nothing.
|
|
2417
|
|
2418 *'errorfile'* *'ef'*
|
|
2419 'errorfile' 'ef' string (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
|
|
2420 others: "errors.err")
|
|
2421 global
|
|
2422 {not in Vi}
|
|
2423 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
2424 feature}
|
|
2425 Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
|
|
2426 When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
|
|
2427 following argument. See |-q|.
|
|
2428 NOT used for the ":make" command. See 'makeef' for that.
|
|
2429 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
2430 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
2431 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
2432 security reasons.
|
|
2433
|
|
2434 *'errorformat'* *'efm'*
|
|
2435 'errorformat' 'efm' string (default is very long)
|
|
2436 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
2437 {not in Vi}
|
|
2438 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
2439 feature}
|
|
2440 Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
|
|
2441 (see |errorformat|).
|
|
2442
|
|
2443 *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'*
|
|
2444 'esckeys' 'ek' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
2445 global
|
|
2446 {not in Vi}
|
|
2447 Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert
|
|
2448 mode. When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be
|
|
2449 used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>. The advantage of
|
|
2450 this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of
|
|
2451 after one second. Instead of resetting this option, you might want to
|
|
2452 try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'. Note that
|
|
2453 when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys
|
|
2454 won't work by default.
|
|
2455 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
2456 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
2457
|
|
2458 *'eventignore'* *'ei'*
|
|
2459 'eventignore' 'ei' string (default "")
|
|
2460 global
|
|
2461 {not in Vi}
|
|
2462 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
|
|
2463 feature}
|
|
2464 A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
|
|
2465 When set to "all", all autocommand events are ignored, autocommands
|
|
2466 will not be executed.
|
|
2467 Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names. Example: >
|
|
2468 :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
|
|
2469 <
|
|
2470 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
|
|
2471 'expandtab' 'et' boolean (default off)
|
|
2472 local to buffer
|
|
2473 {not in Vi}
|
|
2474 In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
|
10
|
2475 <Tab>. Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
|
7
|
2476 when 'autoindent' is on. To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
|
|
2477 on, use CTRL-V<Tab>. See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
|
|
2478 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
2479
|
|
2480 *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
|
|
2481 'exrc' 'ex' boolean (default off)
|
|
2482 global
|
|
2483 {not in Vi}
|
|
2484 Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current
|
|
2485 directory. If you switch this option on you should also consider
|
|
2486 setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|). Using a local
|
|
2487 .exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!
|
|
2488 also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|.
|
|
2489 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
2490 security reasons.
|
|
2491
|
|
2492 *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
|
|
2493 'fileencoding' 'fenc' string (default: "")
|
|
2494 local to buffer
|
|
2495 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
2496 feature}
|
|
2497 {not in Vi}
|
|
2498 Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.
|
|
2499 When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
|
|
2500 done when reading and writing the file.
|
|
2501 When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
|
|
2502 used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
|
|
2503 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
|
|
2504 'encoding' is "utf-8" conversion is most likely done in a way
|
|
2505 that the reverse conversion results in the same text. When
|
|
2506 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost!
|
|
2507 See 'encoding' for the possible values. Additionally, values may be
|
|
2508 specified that can be handled by the converter, see
|
|
2509 |mbyte-conversion|.
|
|
2510 When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
|
|
2511 To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
|
|
2512 'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.
|
|
2513 Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
|
|
2514 When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase. Thus
|
|
2515 you can set it with uppercase values too. '_' characters are
|
|
2516 replaced with '-'. If a name is recognized from the list for
|
|
2517 'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name. For example
|
|
2518 "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
|
|
2519 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
|
|
2520 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
|
|
2521 If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to
|
|
2522 avoid this.
|
|
2523 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
|
|
2524
|
|
2525 *'fe'*
|
|
2526 NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the
|
10
|
2527 whole of Vim, this was a mistake. Now use 'encoding' instead. The
|
7
|
2528 old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.
|
|
2529
|
|
2530 *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
|
39
|
2531 'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom",
|
|
2532 "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when
|
|
2533 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
|
7
|
2534 global
|
|
2535 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
2536 feature}
|
|
2537 {not in Vi}
|
|
2538 This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
|
|
2539 an existing file. When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
|
|
2540 mentioned character encoding. If an error is detected, the next one
|
|
2541 in the list is tried. When an encoding is found that works,
|
10
|
2542 'fileencoding' is set to it. If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
|
7
|
2543 an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used.
|
|
2544 WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information! When
|
|
2545 'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)
|
|
2546 conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse
|
|
2547 conversion results in the same text. When 'encoding' is not
|
|
2548 "utf-8" special characters may be lost!
|
|
2549 For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
|
|
2550 will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
|
|
2551 "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present). If you prefer
|
|
2552 another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
|
|
2553 preferred encoding is to be used. Example: >
|
|
2554 au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
|
|
2555 \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
|
|
2556 < This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
|
|
2557 non-blank characters.
|
|
2558 Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for an new file, 'fileencoding'
|
|
2559 is always empty then. This means that a non-existing file may get a
|
|
2560 different encoding than an empty file.
|
|
2561 The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
|
|
2562 (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file. It must not be preceded
|
|
2563 by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
|
|
2564 An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
|
|
2565 because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
|
|
2566 accepted.
|
39
|
2567 The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
|
|
2568 environment. This is the default value for 'encoding'. It is useful
|
|
2569 when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a
|
|
2570 non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian.
|
7
|
2571 WRONG VALUES: WHAT'S WRONG:
|
|
2572 latin1,utf-8 "latin1" will always be used
|
|
2573 utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1 BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
|
|
2574 file
|
|
2575 cp1250,latin1 "cp1250" will always be used
|
|
2576 If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
|
|
2577 See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
|
|
2578 Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
|
|
2579 is read.
|
|
2580
|
|
2581 *'fileformat'* *'ff'*
|
|
2582 'fileformat' 'ff' string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",
|
|
2583 Unix default: "unix",
|
|
2584 Macintosh default: "mac")
|
|
2585 local to buffer
|
|
2586 {not in Vi}
|
|
2587 This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
|
|
2588 reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
|
|
2589 dos <CR> <NL>
|
|
2590 unix <NL>
|
|
2591 mac <CR>
|
|
2592 When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
|
|
2593 See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
|
|
2594 For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
|
|
2595 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
|
|
2596 works like it was set to "unix'.
|
|
2597 This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
|
|
2598 'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
|
|
2599 When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
|
|
2600 option is set, because the file would be different when written.
|
|
2601 This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
|
|
2602 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",
|
|
2603 'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.
|
|
2604
|
|
2605 *'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
|
|
2606 'fileformats' 'ffs' string (default:
|
|
2607 Vim+Vi MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",
|
|
2608 Vim Unix: "unix,dos",
|
|
2609 Vim Mac: "mac,unix,dos",
|
|
2610 Vi Cygwin: "unix,dos",
|
|
2611 Vi others: "")
|
|
2612 global
|
|
2613 {not in Vi}
|
|
2614 This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
|
|
2615 starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
|
|
2616 buffer:
|
|
2617 - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
|
|
2618 always. It is not set automatically.
|
|
2619 - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
|
10
|
2620 is opened. 'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer. The
|
7
|
2621 'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
|
|
2622 buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
|
|
2623 - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
|
|
2624 <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file. When starting to
|
|
2625 edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
|
|
2626 1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
|
|
2627 'fileformat' is set to "dos".
|
|
2628 2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
|
10
|
2629 is set to "unix". Note that when a <NL> is found without a
|
7
|
2630 preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
|
|
2631 3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
|
|
2632 This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present,
|
|
2633 or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not
|
|
2634 present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file.
|
|
2635 Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before
|
|
2636 the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in
|
|
2637 the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
|
|
2638 4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
|
|
2639 'fileformats' is used.
|
|
2640 When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
|
|
2641 this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
|
|
2642 file only, the option is not changed.
|
|
2643 When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
|
|
2644
|
|
2645 For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
|
|
2646 are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
|
|
2647 done:
|
|
2648 - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection. Dos
|
|
2649 format will be used.
|
|
2650 - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
|
|
2651 is done. This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
|
|
2652 <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
|
|
2653 used.
|
|
2654 Also see |file-formats|.
|
|
2655 For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty
|
|
2656 string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,
|
|
2657 otherwise 'textauto' is set.
|
|
2658 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
2659 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
2660
|
|
2661 *'filetype'* *'ft'*
|
|
2662 'filetype' 'ft' string (default: "")
|
|
2663 local to buffer
|
|
2664 {not in Vi}
|
|
2665 {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
|
|
2666 feature}
|
|
2667 When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
|
|
2668 All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
|
|
2669 executed. Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
|
|
2670 name.
|
|
2671 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
|
|
2672 This option is normally set when the file type is detected. To enable
|
|
2673 this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
|
|
2674 Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
|
|
2675 for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
|
|
2676 Example, for in an IDL file: >
|
|
2677 /* vim: set filetype=idl : */
|
|
2678 < |FileType| |filetypes|
|
|
2679 Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file
|
|
2680 type that is actually stored with the file.
|
|
2681 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
|
|
2682 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
|
36
|
2683 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
7
|
2684
|
|
2685 *'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
|
|
2686 'fillchars' 'fcs' string (default "vert:|,fold:-")
|
|
2687 global
|
|
2688 {not in Vi}
|
|
2689 {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
|
|
2690 and |+folding| features}
|
|
2691 Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.
|
|
2692 It is a comma separated list of items:
|
|
2693
|
|
2694 item default Used for ~
|
|
2695 stl:c ' ' or '^' statusline of the current window
|
|
2696 stlnc:c ' ' or '-' statusline of the non-current windows
|
|
2697 vert:c '|' vertical separators |:vsplit|
|
|
2698 fold:c '-' filling 'foldtext'
|
|
2699 diff:c '-' deleted lines of the 'diff' option
|
|
2700
|
10
|
2701 Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default. For "stl" and
|
7
|
2702 "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'
|
|
2703 otherwise.
|
|
2704
|
|
2705 Example: >
|
|
2706 :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-
|
|
2707 < This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
|
|
2708 be used when there is highlighting.
|
|
2709
|
|
2710 The highlighting used for these items:
|
|
2711 item highlight group ~
|
|
2712 stl:c StatusLine |hl-StatusLine|
|
|
2713 stlnc:c StatusLineNC |hl-StatusLineNC|
|
|
2714 vert:c VertSplit |hl-VertSplit|
|
|
2715 fold:c Folded |hl-Folded|
|
|
2716 diff:c DiffDelete |hl-DiffDelete|
|
|
2717
|
|
2718 *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
|
|
2719 'fkmap' 'fk' boolean (default off) *E198*
|
|
2720 global
|
|
2721 {not in Vi}
|
|
2722 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
2723 feature}
|
|
2724 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.
|
|
2725 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
|
10
|
2726 toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|. See |farsi.txt|.
|
7
|
2727
|
|
2728 *'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
|
|
2729 'foldclose' 'fcl' string (default "")
|
|
2730 global
|
|
2731 {not in Vi}
|
|
2732 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2733 feature}
|
|
2734 When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
|
|
2735 its level is higher than 'foldlevel'. Useful if you want folds to
|
|
2736 automatically close when moving out of them.
|
|
2737
|
|
2738 *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
|
|
2739 'foldcolumn' 'fdc' number (default 0)
|
|
2740 local to window
|
|
2741 {not in Vi}
|
|
2742 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2743 feature}
|
|
2744 When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side
|
|
2745 of the window which indicates open and closed folds. The maximum
|
|
2746 value is 12.
|
|
2747 See |folding|.
|
|
2748
|
|
2749 *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
|
|
2750 'foldenable' 'fen' boolean (default on)
|
|
2751 local to window
|
|
2752 {not in Vi}
|
|
2753 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2754 feature}
|
|
2755 When off, all folds are open. This option can be used to quickly
|
|
2756 switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
|
|
2757 folds (including manually opened or closed folds). It can be toggled
|
10
|
2758 with the |zi| command. The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
|
7
|
2759 'foldenable' is off.
|
|
2760 This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
|
|
2761 See |folding|.
|
|
2762
|
|
2763 *'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
|
|
2764 'foldexpr' 'fde' string (default: "0")
|
|
2765 local to window
|
|
2766 {not in Vi}
|
|
2767 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2768 or |+eval| feature}
|
|
2769 The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr". It is evaluated
|
|
2770 for each line to obtain its fold level. See |fold-expr|. Also see
|
|
2771 |eval-sandbox|.
|
|
2772
|
|
2773 *'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
|
|
2774 'foldignore' 'fdi' string (default: "#")
|
|
2775 local to window
|
|
2776 {not in Vi}
|
|
2777 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2778 feature}
|
|
2779 Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent". Lines starting with
|
|
2780 characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
|
10
|
2781 lines. White space is skipped before checking for this character.
|
7
|
2782 The default "#" works well for C programs. See |fold-indent|.
|
|
2783
|
|
2784 *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
|
|
2785 'foldlevel' 'fdl' number (default: 0)
|
|
2786 local to window
|
|
2787 {not in Vi}
|
|
2788 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2789 feature}
|
|
2790 Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
|
|
2791 Setting this option to zero will close all folds. Higher numbers will
|
|
2792 close fewer folds.
|
|
2793 This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
|
|
2794 See |fold-foldlevel|.
|
|
2795
|
|
2796 *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
|
|
2797 'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1)
|
|
2798 global
|
|
2799 {not in Vi}
|
|
2800 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2801 feature}
|
|
2802 Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
|
|
2803 Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
|
|
2804 some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
|
|
2805 This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
|
10
|
2806 overrules this option. Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
|
7
|
2807 ignores this option and closes all folds.
|
|
2808 It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
|
|
2809 overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
|
|
2810 When the value is negative, it is not used.
|
|
2811
|
|
2812 *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
|
|
2813 'foldmarker' 'fmr' string (default: "{{{,}}}")
|
|
2814 local to window
|
|
2815 {not in Vi}
|
|
2816 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2817 feature}
|
|
2818 The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker". There
|
|
2819 must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker. The
|
|
2820 marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
|
|
2821 See |fold-marker|.
|
|
2822
|
|
2823 *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
|
|
2824 'foldmethod' 'fdm' string (default: "manual")
|
|
2825 local to window
|
|
2826 {not in Vi}
|
|
2827 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2828 feature}
|
|
2829 The kind of folding used for the current window. Possible values:
|
|
2830 |fold-manual| manual Folds are created manually.
|
|
2831 |fold-indent| indent Lines with equal indent form a fold.
|
|
2832 |fold-expr| expr 'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
|
|
2833 |fold-marker| marker Markers are used to specify folds.
|
|
2834 |fold-syntax| syntax Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
|
|
2835 |fold-diff| diff Fold text that is not changed.
|
|
2836
|
|
2837 *'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
|
|
2838 'foldminlines' 'fml' number (default: 1)
|
|
2839 local to window
|
|
2840 {not in Vi}
|
|
2841 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2842 feature}
|
|
2843 Sets the minimum number of screen lines for a fold to be displayed
|
|
2844 closed. Also for manually closed folds.
|
|
2845 Note that this only has an effect of what is displayed. After using
|
|
2846 "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
|
|
2847 than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
|
|
2848
|
|
2849 *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
|
|
2850 'foldnestmax' 'fdn' number (default: 20)
|
|
2851 local to window
|
|
2852 {not in Vi}
|
|
2853 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2854 feature}
|
|
2855 Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
|
|
2856 methods. This avoids that too many folds will be created. Using more
|
|
2857 than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
|
|
2858
|
|
2859 *'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
|
|
2860 'foldopen' 'fdo' string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,
|
|
2861 search,tag,undo")
|
|
2862 global
|
|
2863 {not in Vi}
|
|
2864 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2865 feature}
|
|
2866 Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
|
|
2867 command moves the cursor into a closed fold. It is a comma separated
|
|
2868 list of items.
|
|
2869 item commands ~
|
|
2870 all any
|
|
2871 block "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.
|
|
2872 hor horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
|
|
2873 insert any command in Insert mode
|
|
2874 jump far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
|
|
2875 mark jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
|
|
2876 percent "%"
|
|
2877 quickfix ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
|
|
2878 search search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
|
|
2879 (not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
|
|
2880 tag jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
|
|
2881 undo undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
|
10
|
2882 When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used. Add
|
7
|
2883 the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
|
|
2884 When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
|
|
2885 this option is not used. This means the operator will include the
|
|
2886 whole closed fold.
|
|
2887 Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
|
|
2888 very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
|
|
2889 In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
|
|
2890 when text is inserted.
|
|
2891 To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
|
|
2892 set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
|
|
2893
|
|
2894 *'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
|
|
2895 'foldtext' 'fdt' string (default: "foldtext()")
|
|
2896 local to window
|
|
2897 {not in Vi}
|
|
2898 {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
|
|
2899 feature}
|
|
2900 An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
|
|
2901 fold. See |fold-foldtext|.
|
|
2902
|
|
2903 *'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
|
|
2904 'formatoptions' 'fo' string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
|
|
2905 local to buffer
|
|
2906 {not in Vi}
|
|
2907 This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
|
|
2908 formatting is to be done. See |fo-table|. When the 'paste' option is
|
|
2909 on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty). Commas can
|
|
2910 be inserted for readability.
|
|
2911 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
|
2912 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
|
2913 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
2914 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
2915
|
41
|
2916 *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'*
|
|
2917 'formatlistpat' 'flp' string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*")
|
|
2918 local to buffer
|
|
2919 {not in Vi}
|
|
2920 A pattern that is used to recognize a list header. This is used for
|
|
2921 the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
|
|
2922 The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
|
140
|
2923 the line below it. You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match
|
41
|
2924 while still checking more characters. There must be a character
|
|
2925 following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
|
|
2926 like there is no match.
|
|
2927 The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
|
|
2928 character and white space.
|
|
2929
|
7
|
2930 *'formatprg'* *'fp'*
|
|
2931 'formatprg' 'fp' string (default "")
|
|
2932 global
|
|
2933 {not in Vi}
|
|
2934 The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
|
|
2935 selected with the "gq" command. The program must take the input on
|
|
2936 stdin and produce the output on stdout. The Unix program "fmt" is
|
557
|
2937 such a program.
|
|
2938 If this option is an empty string, the internal format function will
|
|
2939 be used |C-indenting|.
|
|
2940 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See |option-backslash|
|
|
2941 about including spaces and backslashes.
|
7
|
2942 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
2943 security reasons.
|
|
2944
|
36
|
2945 *'fsync'* *'fs'*
|
|
2946 'fsync' 'fs' boolean (default on)
|
|
2947 global
|
|
2948 {not in Vi}
|
|
2949 When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a
|
|
2950 file. This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely
|
|
2951 written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling. This
|
|
2952 will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop
|
|
2953 mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations. Be warned that
|
|
2954 turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash. On
|
|
2955 systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always
|
|
2956 off.
|
|
2957 Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files.
|
|
2958
|
7
|
2959 *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
|
|
2960 'gdefault' 'gd' boolean (default off)
|
|
2961 global
|
|
2962 {not in Vi}
|
|
2963 When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on. This means that
|
|
2964 all matches in a line are substituted instead of one. When a 'g' flag
|
|
2965 is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
|
|
2966 of all or one match. See |complex-change|.
|
|
2967
|
|
2968 command 'gdefault' on 'gdefault' off ~
|
|
2969 :s/// subst. all subst. one
|
|
2970 :s///g subst. one subst. all
|
|
2971 :s///gg subst. all subst. one
|
|
2972
|
|
2973 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
2974
|
|
2975 *'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
|
|
2976 'grepformat' 'gfm' string (default "%f:%l%m,%f %l%m")
|
|
2977 global
|
|
2978 {not in Vi}
|
|
2979 Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
|
|
2980 This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
|
|
2981 'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.
|
|
2982
|
|
2983 *'grepprg'* *'gp'*
|
|
2984 'grepprg' 'gp' string (default "grep -n ",
|
|
2985 Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",
|
|
2986 Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",
|
|
2987 VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")
|
|
2988 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
2989 {not in Vi}
|
233
|
2990 Program to use for the |:grep| command. This option may contain '%'
|
7
|
2991 and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
|
|
2992 line. The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
|
|
2993 will be included. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. See
|
|
2994 |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
2995 When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
|
|
2996 also work well with a single file: >
|
|
2997 :set grepprg=grep\ -nH
|
161
|
2998 < Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command
|
|
2999 works like |:vimgrep| and |:grepadd| like |:vimgrepadd|.
|
41
|
3000 See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
|
7
|
3001 apply equally to 'grepprg'.
|
|
3002 For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
|
|
3003 otherwise it's "grep -n".
|
|
3004 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
3005 security reasons.
|
|
3006
|
|
3007 *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
|
|
3008 'guicursor' 'gcr' string (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,
|
|
3009 ve:ver35-Cursor,
|
|
3010 o:hor50-Cursor,
|
|
3011 i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,
|
|
3012 r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,
|
|
3013 sm:block-Cursor
|
|
3014 -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",
|
|
3015 for MS-DOS and Win32 console:
|
|
3016 "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,
|
|
3017 r-cr:hor30,sm:block")
|
|
3018 global
|
|
3019 {not in Vi}
|
|
3020 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and
|
|
3021 for MS-DOS and Win32 console}
|
|
3022 This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different
|
10
|
3023 modes. It fully works in the GUI. In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only
|
7
|
3024 the height of the cursor can be changed. This can be done by
|
|
3025 specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
|
|
3026 horizontal cursor.
|
36
|
3027 For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used.
|
7
|
3028
|
10
|
3029 The option is a comma separated list of parts. Each part consist of a
|
7
|
3030 mode-list and an argument-list:
|
|
3031 mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
|
|
3032 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
|
|
3033 n Normal mode
|
|
3034 v Visual mode
|
|
3035 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
|
|
3036 if not specified)
|
|
3037 o Operator-pending mode
|
|
3038 i Insert mode
|
|
3039 r Replace mode
|
|
3040 c Command-line Normal (append) mode
|
|
3041 ci Command-line Insert mode
|
|
3042 cr Command-line Replace mode
|
|
3043 sm showmatch in Insert mode
|
|
3044 a all modes
|
|
3045 The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
|
|
3046 hor{N} horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
|
|
3047 ver{N} vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
|
|
3048 block block cursor, fills the whole character
|
|
3049 [only one of the above three should be present]
|
|
3050 blinkwait{N} *cursor-blinking*
|
|
3051 blinkon{N}
|
|
3052 blinkoff{N}
|
|
3053 blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
|
|
3054 the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
|
|
3055 the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
|
|
3056 cursor is not shown. The times are in msec. When one
|
|
3057 of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking. The
|
|
3058 default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".
|
|
3059 These numbers are used for a missing entry. This
|
|
3060 means that blinking is enabled by default. To switch
|
|
3061 blinking off you can use "blinkon0". The cursor only
|
|
3062 blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while
|
|
3063 executing a command.
|
|
3064 To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see
|
|
3065 |xterm-blink|.
|
|
3066 {group-name}
|
|
3067 a highlight group name, that sets the color and font
|
|
3068 for the cursor
|
|
3069 {group-name}/{group-name}
|
|
3070 Two highlight group names, the first is used when
|
|
3071 no language mappings are used, the other when they
|
|
3072 are. |language-mapping|
|
|
3073
|
|
3074 Examples of parts:
|
|
3075 n-c-v:block-nCursor in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
|
|
3076 block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
|
|
3077 highlight group
|
|
3078 i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
|
|
3079 In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
|
|
3080 30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
|
|
3081 "iCursor" highlight group. Blink a bit
|
|
3082 faster.
|
|
3083
|
|
3084 The 'a' mode is different. It will set the given argument-list for
|
|
3085 all modes. It does not reset anything to defaults. This can be used
|
|
3086 to do a common setting for all modes. For example, to switch off
|
|
3087 blinking: "a:blinkon0"
|
|
3088
|
|
3089 Examples of cursor highlighting: >
|
|
3090 :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
|
|
3091 :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
|
|
3092 <
|
|
3093 *'guifont'* *'gfn'*
|
|
3094 *E235* *E596* *E610* *E611*
|
|
3095 'guifont' 'gfn' string (default "")
|
|
3096 global
|
|
3097 {not in Vi}
|
|
3098 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
|
3099 This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
|
|
3100 In its simplest form the value is just one font name. When
|
|
3101 the font cannot be found you will get an error message. To try other
|
|
3102 font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
|
|
3103 The first valid font is used.
|
8
|
3104
|
170
|
3105 On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is
|
|
3106 not empty, then 'guifont' is not used.
|
8
|
3107
|
7
|
3108 Spaces after a comma are ignored. To include a comma in a font name
|
|
3109 precede it with a backslash. Setting an option requires an extra
|
|
3110 backslash before a space and a backslash. See also
|
|
3111 |option-backslash|. For example: >
|
|
3112 :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
|
8
|
3113 < will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
|
7
|
3114 will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
|
8
|
3115
|
|
3116 If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
|
|
3117 If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
|
|
3118 settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
|
|
3119 will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
|
|
3120 the case of X). The font names given should be "normal" fonts. Vim
|
|
3121 will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.
|
|
3122
|
170
|
3123 For Win32, GTK, Mac OS and Photon: >
|
8
|
3124 :set guifont=*
|
|
3125 < will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
|
|
3126
|
|
3127 The font name depends on the GUI used. See |setting-guifont| for a
|
|
3128 way to set 'guifont' for various systems.
|
|
3129
|
7
|
3130 For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: >
|
|
3131 :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
|
|
3132 < That's all. XLFDs are no longer accepted.
|
170
|
3133
|
|
3134 For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >
|
|
3135 :set guifont=Monaco:h10
|
|
3136 < *E236*
|
7
|
3137 Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
|
8
|
3138 width). An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but
|
|
3139 mono-spaced fonts look best.
|
|
3140
|
7
|
3141 To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
|
|
3142 program. The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
|
8
|
3143
|
7
|
3144 For the Win32 GUI *E244* *E245*
|
|
3145 - takes these options in the font name:
|
|
3146 hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
|
|
3147 wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
|
|
3148 b - bold
|
|
3149 i - italic
|
|
3150 u - underline
|
|
3151 s - strikeout
|
233
|
3152 cXX - character set XX. Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
|
7
|
3153 BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
|
|
3154 HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
|
|
3155 SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
|
22
|
3156 Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".
|
7
|
3157
|
|
3158 Use a ':' to separate the options.
|
|
3159 - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
|
|
3160 backslashes to escape the spaces.
|
|
3161 - Examples: >
|
|
3162 :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
|
|
3163 :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
|
|
3164 < See also |font-sizes|.
|
|
3165
|
|
3166 *'guifontset'* *'gfs'*
|
|
3167 *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598*
|
|
3168 'guifontset' 'gfs' string (default "")
|
|
3169 global
|
|
3170 {not in Vi}
|
|
3171 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
|
|
3172 with the |+xfontset| feature}
|
|
3173 {not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
|
3174 When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used. The first
|
|
3175 one for normal English, the second one for your special language. See
|
|
3176 |xfontset|.
|
|
3177 Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as
|
|
3178 a fontset name. Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
|
|
3179 |:highlight| command.
|
|
3180 The fonts must match with the current locale. If fonts for the
|
|
3181 character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting
|
|
3182 'guifontset' will fail.
|
|
3183 Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
|
|
3184 the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
|
|
3185 used. In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
|
|
3186 including the commas. It is not possible to specify alternative
|
|
3187 fontset names.
|
|
3188 This example works on many X11 systems: >
|
|
3189 :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
|
|
3190 <
|
|
3191 *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
|
|
3192 'guifontwide' 'gfw' string (default "")
|
|
3193 global
|
|
3194 {not in Vi}
|
|
3195 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
|
3196 When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used
|
|
3197 for double-width characters. The first font that can be loaded is
|
|
3198 used.
|
|
3199 Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
|
|
3200 specified with 'guifont' and the same height.
|
|
3201
|
|
3202 All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:
|
|
3203
|
|
3204 'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
|
|
3205 'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
|
|
3206 When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
|
|
3207 'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
|
|
3208 double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.
|
|
3209
|
|
3210 GTK+ 2 GUI only: *guifontwide_gtk2*
|
|
3211
|
|
3212 If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
|
|
3213 characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
|
|
3214 Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
|
10
|
3215 automatically. If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
|
7
|
3216 font for characters not available in 'guifont'. Thus you do not need
|
|
3217 to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
|
|
3218 made by Pango/Xft.
|
|
3219
|
|
3220 *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
|
|
3221 'guiheadroom' 'ghr' number (default 50)
|
|
3222 global
|
|
3223 {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI}
|
|
3224 The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting
|
|
3225 the GUI window on the screen. Set this before the GUI is started,
|
|
3226 e.g., in your |gvimrc| file. When zero, the whole screen height will
|
10
|
3227 be used by the window. When positive, the specified number of pixel
|
7
|
3228 lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the
|
|
3229 screen. Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the
|
|
3230 screen.
|
|
3231
|
|
3232 *'guioptions'* *'go'*
|
|
3233 'guioptions' 'go' string (default "gmrLtT" (MS-Windows),
|
233
|
3234 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))
|
7
|
3235 global
|
|
3236 {not in Vi}
|
|
3237 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
8
|
3238 This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim. It is a
|
7
|
3239 sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
|
|
3240 GUI should be used.
|
|
3241 To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
|
|
3242 "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
|
|
3243
|
|
3244 Valid letters are as follows:
|
|
3245 *guioptions_a*
|
|
3246 'a' Autoselect: If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
|
|
3247 or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
|
|
3248 the windowing system's global selection. This means that the
|
|
3249 Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
|
|
3250 applications as well as into Vim itself. When the Visual mode
|
|
3251 ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
|
|
3252 application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
|
|
3253 is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
|
|
3254 Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
|
|
3255 applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
|
|
3256 If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
|
|
3257 windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
|
|
3258 by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
|
|
3259 The same applies to the modeless selection.
|
|
3260
|
10
|
3261 'A' Autoselect for the modeless selection. Like 'a', but only
|
7
|
3262 applies to the modeless selection.
|
|
3263
|
|
3264 'guioptions' autoselect Visual autoselect modeless ~
|
|
3265 "" - -
|
|
3266 "a" yes yes
|
|
3267 "A" - yes
|
|
3268 "aA" yes yes
|
|
3269
|
|
3270 'c' Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
|
|
3271 choices.
|
|
3272
|
|
3273 'f' Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
|
|
3274 where it was started. Use this for programs that wait for the
|
|
3275 editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program). Alternatively you
|
|
3276 can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
|
|
3277 foreground. |gui-fork|
|
|
3278 Note: Set this option in the vimrc file. The forking may have
|
|
3279 happened already when the gvimrc file is read.
|
|
3280
|
|
3281 'i' Use a Vim icon. For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
|
|
3282 corner of the window. It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
|
|
3283 limitations of X11. For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
|
|
3284
|
|
3285 'm' Menu bar is present.
|
10
|
3286 'M' The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced. Note
|
7
|
3287 that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
|
|
3288 switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the .gvimrc
|
|
3289 file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
|
|
3290 ":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
|
|
3291 'g' Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey. If
|
|
3292 'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
|
|
3293 Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
|
|
3294
|
|
3295 't' Include tearoff menu items. Currently only works for Win32,
|
|
3296 GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
|
236
|
3297 'T' Include Toolbar. Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon
|
|
3298 and Athena GUIs.
|
7
|
3299
|
|
3300 'r' Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
|
|
3301 'R' Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
|
|
3302 split window.
|
|
3303 'l' Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
|
|
3304 'L' Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
|
|
3305 split window.
|
|
3306 'b' Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present. Its size depends on
|
|
3307 the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
|
|
3308 flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
|
|
3309 'h' Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
|
|
3310 line. Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|
|
|
3311
|
|
3312 And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
|
|
3313 you really want to :-). See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
|
|
3314
|
|
3315 'v' Use a vertical button layout for dialogs. When not included,
|
|
3316 a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
|
|
3317 vertical layout is used anyway.
|
|
3318 'p' Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI. This is required for some
|
|
3319 window managers. If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
|
|
3320 the right moment, try adding this flag. This must be done
|
|
3321 before starting the GUI. Set it in your gvimrc. Adding or
|
|
3322 removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
|
10
|
3323 'F' Add a footer. Only for Motif. See |gui-footer|.
|
7
|
3324
|
|
3325 *'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
|
|
3326 'guipty' boolean (default on)
|
|
3327 global
|
|
3328 {not in Vi}
|
|
3329 {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
|
|
3330 Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for
|
|
3331 I/O to/from shell commands. See |gui-pty|.
|
|
3332
|
|
3333 *'helpfile'* *'hf'*
|
|
3334 'helpfile' 'hf' string (default (MSDOS) "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
|
|
3335 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
|
|
3336 global
|
|
3337 {not in Vi}
|
|
3338 Name of the main help file. All distributed help files should be
|
|
3339 placed together in one directory. Additionally, all "doc" directories
|
|
3340 in 'runtimepath' will be used.
|
|
3341 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. For example:
|
|
3342 "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt". If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
|
10
|
3343 tried. Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
|
7
|
3344 spaces and backslashes.
|
|
3345 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
3346 security reasons.
|
|
3347
|
|
3348 *'helpheight'* *'hh'*
|
|
3349 'helpheight' 'hh' number (default 20)
|
|
3350 global
|
|
3351 {not in Vi}
|
|
3352 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
3353 feature}
|
|
3354 Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
|
|
3355 ":help" command. The initial height of the help window is half of the
|
|
3356 current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
|
|
3357 windows. When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
|
|
3358 set to 'helpheight'. Set to zero to disable.
|
|
3359
|
|
3360 *'helplang'* *'hlg'*
|
|
3361 'helplang' 'hlg' string (default: messages language or empty)
|
|
3362 global
|
|
3363 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang|
|
|
3364 feature}
|
|
3365 {not in Vi}
|
|
3366 Comma separated list of languages. Vim will use the first language
|
|
3367 for which the desired help can be found. The English help will always
|
|
3368 be used as a last resort. You can add "en" to prefer English over
|
|
3369 another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
|
|
3370 language and not in the English help.
|
|
3371 Example: >
|
|
3372 :set helplang=de,it
|
|
3373 < This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
|
|
3374 files.
|
|
3375 When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
|
|
3376 try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
|
|
3377 See |help-translated|.
|
|
3378
|
|
3379 *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
|
|
3380 'hidden' 'hid' boolean (default off)
|
|
3381 global
|
|
3382 {not in Vi}
|
|
3383 When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed. When on a
|
|
3384 buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed. If the buffer is still
|
|
3385 displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.
|
|
3386 The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer
|
|
3387 hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is
|
|
3388 modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'
|
10
|
3389 flag was used. See also |windows.txt|.
|
12
|
3390 To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option.
|
7
|
3391 This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
|
|
3392 WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.
|
|
3393 Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".
|
|
3394
|
|
3395 *'highlight'* *'hl'*
|
|
3396 'highlight' 'hl' string (default (as a single string):
|
|
3397 "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
|
|
3398 e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
|
|
3399 M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
|
|
3400 s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit
|
|
3401 t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
|
|
3402 f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
|
|
3403 C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
|
386
|
3404 >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
|
540
|
3405 R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal,
|
|
3406 +:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,
|
|
3407 x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb")
|
7
|
3408 global
|
|
3409 {not in Vi}
|
|
3410 This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
|
|
3411 occasions. It is a comma separated list of character pairs. The
|
|
3412 first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
|
10
|
3413 use for that occasion. The occasions are:
|
7
|
3414 |hl-SpecialKey| 8 Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
|
|
3415 |hl-NonText| @ '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
|
|
3416 characters from 'showbreak'
|
|
3417 |hl-Directory| d directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
|
|
3418 things in listings
|
|
3419 |hl-ErrorMsg| e error messages
|
|
3420 h (obsolete, ignored)
|
|
3421 |hl-IncSearch| i 'incsearch' highlighting
|
|
3422 |hl-Search| l last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
|
|
3423 |hl-MoreMsg| m |more-prompt|
|
|
3424 |hl-ModeMsg| M Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
|
|
3425 |hl-LineNr| n line number for ":number" and ":#" commands
|
|
3426 |hl-Question| r |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
|
|
3427 |hl-StatusLine| s status line of current window |status-line|
|
|
3428 |hl-StatusLineNC| S status lines of not-current windows
|
|
3429 |hl-Title| t Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
|
|
3430 |hl-VertSplit| c column used to separate vertically split windows
|
|
3431 |hl-Visual| v Visual mode
|
|
3432 |hl-VisualNOS| V Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the
|
|
3433 Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and
|
|
3434 |xterm-clipboard|.
|
|
3435 |hl-WarningMsg| w warning messages
|
|
3436 |hl-WildMenu| W wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
|
|
3437 |hl-Folded| f line used for closed folds
|
|
3438 |hl-FoldColumn| F 'foldcolumn'
|
386
|
3439 |hl-DiffAdd| A added line in diff mode
|
|
3440 |hl-DiffChange| C changed line in diff mode
|
|
3441 |hl-DiffDelete| D deleted line in diff mode
|
|
3442 |hl-DiffText| T inserted text in diff mode
|
7
|
3443 |hl-SignColumn| > column used for |signs|
|
221
|
3444 |hl-SpellBad| B misspelled word |spell|
|
386
|
3445 |hl-SpellCap| P word that should start with capital|spell|
|
221
|
3446 |hl-SpellRare| R rare word |spell|
|
|
3447 |hl-SpellLocal| L word from other region |spell|
|
540
|
3448 |hl-Pmenu| + popup menu normal line
|
|
3449 |hl-PmenuSel| = popup menu normal line
|
|
3450 |hl-PmenuSbar| x popup menu scrollbar
|
|
3451 |hl-PmenuThumb| X popup menu scrollbar thumb
|
7
|
3452
|
|
3453 The display modes are:
|
|
3454 r reverse (termcap entry "mr" and "me")
|
|
3455 i italic (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")
|
|
3456 b bold (termcap entry "md" and "me")
|
|
3457 s standout (termcap entry "so" and "se")
|
|
3458 u underline (termcap entry "us" and "ue")
|
205
|
3459 c undercurl (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce")
|
7
|
3460 n no highlighting
|
|
3461 - no highlighting
|
|
3462 : use a highlight group
|
|
3463 The default is used for occasions that are not included.
|
|
3464 If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors|
|
|
3465 for an example.
|
|
3466 When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of
|
|
3467 a highlight group. A highlight group can be used to define any type
|
|
3468 of highlighting, including using color. See |:highlight| on how to
|
|
3469 define one. The default uses a different group for each occasion.
|
|
3470 See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups.
|
|
3471
|
|
3472 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
|
|
3473 'hlsearch' 'hls' boolean (default off)
|
|
3474 global
|
|
3475 {not in Vi}
|
|
3476 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
3477 |+extra_search| feature}
|
|
3478 When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
|
|
3479 The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the
|
|
3480 'highlight' option. This uses the "Search" highlight group by
|
|
3481 default. Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
|
|
3482 are not applied.
|
|
3483 See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
|
|
3484 When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
|
|
3485 off with |:nohlsearch|. As soon as you use a search command, the
|
|
3486 highlighting comes back.
|
|
3487 When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
|
|
3488 highlight all of the matched text. However, this depends on where the
|
10
|
3489 search starts. This will be the first line in the window or the first
|
7
|
3490 line below a closed fold. A match in a previous line which is not
|
|
3491 drawn may not continue in an newly drawn line.
|
|
3492 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
3493
|
|
3494 *'history'* *'hi'*
|
|
3495 'history' 'hi' number (Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0)
|
|
3496 global
|
|
3497 {not in Vi}
|
|
3498 A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
|
|
3499 are remembered. This option decides how many entries may be stored in
|
|
3500 each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
|
|
3501 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
3502 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
3503
|
|
3504 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'*
|
|
3505 'hkmap' 'hk' boolean (default off)
|
|
3506 global
|
|
3507 {not in Vi}
|
|
3508 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
3509 feature}
|
|
3510 When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.
|
|
3511 Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
|
|
3512 toggle this option. See |rileft.txt|.
|
|
3513 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
3514
|
|
3515 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'*
|
|
3516 'hkmapp' 'hkp' boolean (default off)
|
|
3517 global
|
|
3518 {not in Vi}
|
|
3519 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
3520 feature}
|
|
3521 When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used. 'hkmap' must also be on.
|
|
3522 This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.
|
|
3523 See |rileft.txt|.
|
|
3524 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
3525
|
|
3526 *'icon'* *'noicon'*
|
|
3527 'icon' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
|
|
3528 global
|
|
3529 {not in Vi}
|
|
3530 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
3531 feature}
|
|
3532 When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
|
|
3533 'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
|
|
3534 currently being edited. Only the last part of the name is used.
|
|
3535 Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
|
|
3536 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently
|
|
3537 only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are
|
|
3538 Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the
|
|
3539 builtin termcap).
|
|
3540 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
|
233
|
3541 restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on
|
7
|
3542 X11.
|
|
3543
|
|
3544 *'iconstring'*
|
|
3545 'iconstring' string (default "")
|
|
3546 global
|
|
3547 {not in Vi}
|
|
3548 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
3549 feature}
|
|
3550 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
|
|
3551 the window. This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
|
|
3552 Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
|
|
3553 (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).
|
|
3554 Does not work for MS Windows.
|
|
3555 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
|
|
3556 restored if possible |X11|.
|
|
3557 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
|
10
|
3558 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'. See
|
7
|
3559 'titlestring' for example settings.
|
|
3560 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
|
|
3561
|
|
3562 *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
|
|
3563 'ignorecase' 'ic' boolean (default off)
|
|
3564 global
|
|
3565 Ignore case in search patterns. Also used when searching in the tags
|
|
3566 file.
|
|
3567 Also see 'smartcase'.
|
|
3568 Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
|
|
3569 |/ignorecase|.
|
|
3570
|
|
3571 *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
|
|
3572 'imactivatekey' 'imak' string (default "")
|
|
3573 global
|
|
3574 {not in Vi}
|
|
3575 {only available when compiled with |+xim| and
|
|
3576 |+GUI_GTK|}
|
|
3577 Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
|
|
3578 activation. When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
|
|
3579 IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
|
|
3580 You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option
|
|
3581 tells Vim what the key is.
|
|
3582 Format:
|
|
3583 [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING
|
|
3584
|
|
3585 These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):
|
|
3586 S Shift key
|
|
3587 L Lock key
|
|
3588 C Control key
|
|
3589 1 Mod1 key
|
|
3590 2 Mod2 key
|
|
3591 3 Mod3 key
|
|
3592 4 Mod4 key
|
|
3593 5 Mod5 key
|
|
3594 Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are
|
|
3595 both shift+ctrl+space.
|
|
3596 See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.
|
|
3597
|
|
3598 Example: >
|
|
3599 :set imactivatekey=S-space
|
|
3600 < "S-space" means shift+space. This is the activation key for kinput2 +
|
|
3601 canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).
|
|
3602
|
|
3603 *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'*
|
|
3604 'imcmdline' 'imc' boolean (default off)
|
|
3605 global
|
|
3606 {not in Vi}
|
|
3607 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
|
|
3608 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
|
|
3609 When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
|
|
3610 line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
|
|
3611 Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
|
|
3612 English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
|
|
3613 characters with dead keys.
|
|
3614
|
|
3615 *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'nodisable'* *'noimd'*
|
|
3616 'imdisable' 'imd' boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
|
|
3617 global
|
|
3618 {not in Vi}
|
|
3619 {only available when compiled with the |+xim|
|
|
3620 |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
|
|
3621 When set the Input Method is never used. This is useful to disable
|
|
3622 the IM when it doesn't work properly.
|
|
3623 Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines. This
|
|
3624 may change in later releases.
|
|
3625
|
|
3626 *'iminsert'* *'imi'*
|
|
3627 'iminsert' 'imi' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
|
|
3628 local to buffer
|
|
3629 {not in Vi}
|
|
3630 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
|
|
3631 Insert mode. Valid values:
|
|
3632 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
|
|
3633 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
|
|
3634 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
|
|
3635 2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
|
|
3636 or |global-ime|.
|
|
3637 To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
|
|
3638 this can be used: >
|
|
3639 :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
|
|
3640 < This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
|
|
3641 mode.
|
|
3642 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
|
|
3643 |i_CTRL-^|.
|
|
3644 The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
|
|
3645 It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
|
|
3646 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
|
|
3647 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
|
|
3648
|
|
3649 *'imsearch'* *'ims'*
|
|
3650 'imsearch' 'ims' number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
|
|
3651 local to buffer
|
|
3652 {not in Vi}
|
|
3653 Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
|
|
3654 entering a search pattern. Valid values:
|
|
3655 -1 the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
|
|
3656 'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
|
|
3657 0 :lmap is off and IM is off
|
|
3658 1 :lmap is ON and IM is off
|
|
3659 2 :lmap is off and IM is ON
|
|
3660 Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
|
|
3661 |c_CTRL-^|.
|
|
3662 The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
|
|
3663 option to a valid keymap name.
|
|
3664 The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
|
|
3665 methods. Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
|
|
3666
|
|
3667 *'include'* *'inc'*
|
|
3668 'include' 'inc' string (default "^\s*#\s*include")
|
|
3669 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
3670 {not in Vi}
|
|
3671 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
3672 |+find_in_path| feature}
|
10
|
3673 Pattern to be used to find an include command. It is a search
|
7
|
3674 pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|). The default
|
|
3675 value is for C programs. This option is used for the commands "[i",
|
532
|
3676 "]I", "[d", etc.
|
|
3677 Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that
|
534
|
3678 comes after the matched pattern. But if "\zs" appears in the pattern
|
|
3679 then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it
|
|
3680 appears, is used as the file name. Use this to include characters
|
|
3681 that are not in 'isfname', such as a space. You can then use
|
|
3682 'includeexpr' to process the matched text.
|
532
|
3683 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
7
|
3684
|
|
3685 *'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
|
|
3686 'includeexpr' 'inex' string (default "")
|
|
3687 local to buffer
|
|
3688 {not in Vi}
|
|
3689 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
3690 |+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature}
|
|
3691 Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
|
10
|
3692 option to a file name. Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
|
7
|
3693 :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
|
|
3694 < The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
|
|
3695 Evaluated in the |sandbox|.
|
|
3696 Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
|
10
|
3697 found. Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
|
7
|
3698 Also used for |<cfile>|.
|
|
3699
|
|
3700 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
|
|
3701 'incsearch' 'is' boolean (default off)
|
|
3702 global
|
|
3703 {not in Vi}
|
|
3704 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
3705 |+extra_search| feature}
|
17
|
3706 While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
|
|
3707 so far, matches. The matched string is highlighted. If the pattern
|
|
3708 is invalid or not found, nothing is shown. The screen will be updated
|
|
3709 often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
|
|
3710 Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
|
|
3711 original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>. You
|
|
3712 still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
|
|
3713 cursor to the match.
|
|
3714 The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.
|
|
3715 See also: 'hlsearch'.
|
7
|
3716 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
3717
|
|
3718 *'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
|
|
3719 'indentexpr' 'inde' string (default "")
|
|
3720 local to buffer
|
|
3721 {not in Vi}
|
|
3722 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
3723 or |+eval| features}
|
|
3724 Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
|
|
3725 It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
|
|
3726 in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
|
|
3727 When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
|
|
3728 'smartindent' indenting.
|
|
3729 When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.
|
|
3730 The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
|
534
|
3731 which the indent is to be computed. The cursor is also in this line
|
7
|
3732 when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).
|
|
3733 The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent. It
|
|
3734 can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
|
|
3735 used for the indent).
|
|
3736 Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
|
|
3737 and |lispindent()|.
|
|
3738 The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects! It must
|
|
3739 not change the text, jump to another window, etc. Afterwards the
|
|
3740 cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
|
|
3741 Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
|
|
3742 :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
|
|
3743 < Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
|
|
3744 "msg".
|
|
3745 See |indent-expression|. Also see |eval-sandbox|.
|
|
3746 NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
3747
|
|
3748 *'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
|
|
3749 'indentkeys' 'indk' string (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
|
|
3750 local to buffer
|
|
3751 {not in Vi}
|
|
3752 {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
|
|
3753 feature}
|
|
3754 A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
|
|
3755 the current line. Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
|
|
3756 The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
|
|
3757 See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
|
|
3758
|
|
3759 *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
|
|
3760 'infercase' 'inf' boolean (default off)
|
|
3761 local to buffer
|
|
3762 {not in Vi}
|
|
3763 When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
|
|
3764 'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted. If the
|
|
3765 typed text contains a lowercase letter where the match has an upper
|
|
3766 case letter, the completed part is made lowercase. If the typed text
|
|
3767 has no lowercase letters and the match has a lowercase letter where
|
|
3768 the typed text has an uppercase letter, and there is a letter before
|
|
3769 it, the completed part is made uppercase.
|
|
3770
|
|
3771 *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'*
|
|
3772 'insertmode' 'im' boolean (default off)
|
|
3773 global
|
|
3774 {not in Vi}
|
|
3775 Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode. Useful
|
|
3776 if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor. Used for |evim|.
|
|
3777 These Insert mode commands will be useful:
|
|
3778 - Use the cursor keys to move around.
|
|
3779 - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|). When
|
|
3780 this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
|
|
3781 Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
|
|
3782 - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
|
477
|
3783 <Esc> to get back to Insert mode. Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor
|
|
3784 left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set. |i_CTRL-L|
|
7
|
3785
|
|
3786 These items change when 'insertmode' is set:
|
|
3787 - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.
|
|
3788 - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.
|
|
3789 - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.
|
|
3790 - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.
|
|
3791 - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|. *i_CTRL-Z*
|
|
3792 However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like
|
|
3793 'insertmode' was not set. This was done to be able to use the same
|
|
3794 mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.
|
|
3795 When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used.
|
|
3796
|
|
3797 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
3798
|
|
3799 *'isfname'* *'isf'*
|
|
3800 'isfname' 'isf' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
|
|
3801 "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="
|
|
3802 for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"
|
|
3803 for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"
|
|
3804 for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
|
|
3805 otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
|
|
3806 global
|
|
3807 {not in Vi}
|
|
3808 The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
|
|
3809 path names. Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
|
10
|
3810 the tags file. It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
|
7
|
3811 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
|
|
3812 characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
|
|
3813 For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
|
|
3814
|
|
3815 Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
|
|
3816 do its best to make it work as you would expect. That is a bit
|
|
3817 tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
|
|
3818 characters. Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
|
|
3819 name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes. The
|
|
3820 '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
|
|
3821 cmd.exe.
|
|
3822
|
|
3823 The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
|
10
|
3824 Each part can be a single character number or a range. A range is two
|
|
3825 character numbers with '-' in between. A character number can be a
|
7
|
3826 decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
|
|
3827 not work for digits). Example:
|
|
3828 "_,-,128-140,#-43" (include '_' and '-' and the range
|
|
3829 128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
|
|
3830 If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
|
|
3831 will be excluded from the option. The option is interpreted from left
|
|
3832 to right. Put the excluded character after the range where it is
|
|
3833 included. To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
|
|
3834 option or the end of a range. Example:
|
|
3835 "^a-z,#,^" (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
|
|
3836 If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
|
|
3837 are included. Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
|
|
3838 plus accented characters. To include '@' itself use "@-@". Examples:
|
|
3839 "@,^a-z" All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
|
|
3840 case letters.
|
|
3841 "a-z,A-Z,@-@" All letters plus the '@' character.
|
|
3842 A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
|
|
3843 expected. Example:
|
|
3844 "48-57,,,_" Digits, comma and underscore.
|
|
3845 A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'. Example:
|
|
3846 " -~,^,,9" All characters from space to '~', excluding
|
|
3847 comma, plus <Tab>.
|
|
3848 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
3849
|
|
3850 *'isident'* *'isi'*
|
|
3851 'isident' 'isi' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
|
|
3852 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
|
|
3853 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
|
|
3854 global
|
|
3855 {not in Vi}
|
|
3856 The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
|
|
3857 Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
|
|
3858 match of the 'define' option. It is also used for "\i" in a
|
233
|
3859 |pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
|
7
|
3860 option.
|
|
3861 Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
|
10
|
3862 environment variables. E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
|
7
|
3863 expand "$HOME/.viminfo". Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.
|
|
3864
|
|
3865 *'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
|
|
3866 'iskeyword' 'isk' string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:
|
|
3867 "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
|
|
3868 otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255"
|
|
3869 Vi default: "@,48-57,_")
|
|
3870 local to buffer
|
|
3871 {not in Vi}
|
|
3872 Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
|
10
|
3873 "w", "*", "[i", etc. It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|. See
|
7
|
3874 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option. For C
|
|
3875 programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
|
|
3876 For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
|
|
3877 '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
|
|
3878 command).
|
|
3879 When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
|
|
3880 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
3881 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
3882
|
|
3883 *'isprint'* *'isp'*
|
|
3884 'isprint' 'isp' string (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:
|
|
3885 "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")
|
|
3886 global
|
|
3887 {not in Vi}
|
|
3888 The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
|
|
3889 screen. It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|. The characters from
|
|
3890 space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
|
|
3891 even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded. See
|
|
3892 'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.
|
|
3893
|
|
3894 Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
|
|
3895 0 - 31 "^@" - "^_"
|
|
3896 32 - 126 always single characters
|
|
3897 127 "^?"
|
|
3898 128 - 159 "~@" - "~_"
|
|
3899 160 - 254 "| " - "|~"
|
|
3900 255 "~?"
|
|
3901 When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are
|
|
3902 displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
|
|
3903 When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
|
|
3904 displayed as <xx>.
|
|
3905 The NonText highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
|
|
3906 |hl-NonText|
|
|
3907
|
|
3908 Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
|
|
3909 characters up to 255 are specified with this option. When a character
|
|
3910 is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
|
|
3911 replacement character will be shown.
|
|
3912 Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
|
|
3913 There is no option to specify these characters.
|
|
3914
|
|
3915 *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
|
|
3916 'joinspaces' 'js' boolean (default on)
|
|
3917 global
|
|
3918 {not in Vi}
|
|
3919 Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
|
|
3920 When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.
|
|
3921 Otherwise only one space is inserted.
|
|
3922 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
3923
|
|
3924 *'key'*
|
|
3925 'key' string (default "")
|
|
3926 local to buffer
|
|
3927 {not in Vi}
|
|
3928 The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
|
|
3929 See |encryption|.
|
|
3930 Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
|
|
3931 key. Use the |:X| command. But you can make 'key' empty: >
|
|
3932 :set key=
|
|
3933 < It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or
|
|
3934 "echo &key". This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't
|
|
3935 know. It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,
|
|
3936 be careful not to make a typing error!
|
|
3937
|
|
3938 *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544*
|
|
3939 'keymap' 'kmp' string (default "")
|
|
3940 local to buffer
|
|
3941 {not in Vi}
|
|
3942 {only available when compiled with the |+keymap|
|
|
3943 feature}
|
|
3944 Name of a keyboard mapping. See |mbyte-keymap|.
|
|
3945 Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
|
|
3946 setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
|
|
3947 'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
|
36
|
3948 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
7
|
3949
|
|
3950 *'keymodel'* *'km'*
|
|
3951 'keymodel' 'km' string (default "")
|
|
3952 global
|
|
3953 {not in Vi}
|
|
3954 List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys
|
|
3955 can do. These values can be used:
|
|
3956 startsel Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
|
|
3957 Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
|
|
3958 present in 'selectmode').
|
|
3959 stopsel Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
|
|
3960 Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
|
|
3961 <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
|
|
3962 The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
3963
|
|
3964 *'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
|
|
3965 'keywordprg' 'kp' string (default "man" or "man -s", DOS: ":help",
|
|
3966 OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
|
|
3967 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
3968 {not in Vi}
|
|
3969 Program to use for the |K| command. Environment variables are
|
|
3970 expanded |:set_env|. ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
|
|
3971 help. (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
|
|
3972 value did this, which is now deprecated.)
|
|
3973 When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
|
|
3974 "K" command to a section number. Also for "man -s", in which case the
|
|
3975 "-s" is removed when there is no count.
|
|
3976 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
3977 Example: >
|
|
3978 :set keywordprg=man\ -s
|
|
3979 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
3980 security reasons.
|
|
3981
|
|
3982 *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
|
|
3983 'langmap' 'lmap' string (default "")
|
|
3984 global
|
|
3985 {not in Vi}
|
|
3986 {only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
|
|
3987 feature}
|
|
3988 This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
|
10
|
3989 mode. When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
|
7
|
3990 inserted directly. When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
|
|
3991 care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
|
|
3992 of the key. This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
|
|
3993 be able to execute Normal mode commands.
|
|
3994 This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
|
|
3995 mapped in Insert mode.
|
|
3996 This only works for 8-bit characters. The value of 'langmap' may be
|
|
3997 specified with multi-byte characters (e.g., UTF-8), but only the lower
|
|
3998 8 bits of each character will be used.
|
|
3999
|
|
4000 Example (for Greek): *greek* >
|
|
4001 :set langmap=ÁA,ÂB,ØC,ÄD,ÅE,ÖF,ÃG,ÇH,ÉI,ÎJ,ÊK,ËL,ÌM,ÍN,ÏO,ÐP,QQ,ÑR,ÓS,ÔT,ÈU,ÙV,WW,×X,ÕY,ÆZ,áa,âb,øc,äd,åe,öf,ãg,çh,éi,îj,êk,ël,ìm,ín,ïo,ðp,qq,ñr,ós,ôt,èu,ùv,òw,÷x,õy,æz
|
|
4002 < Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
|
|
4003 :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
|
|
4004 <
|
|
4005 The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas. Each
|
|
4006 part can be in one of two forms:
|
|
4007 1. A list of pairs. Each pair is a "from" character immediately
|
|
4008 followed by the "to" character. Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
|
|
4009 2. A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
|
|
4010 characters. Example: "abc;ABC"
|
|
4011 Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
|
|
4012 Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash. These are
|
|
4013 ";", ',' and backslash itself.
|
|
4014
|
|
4015 This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
|
|
4016 back and forth between the languages. Your language characters will
|
|
4017 be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
|
|
4018 langmap mappings) in the following cases:
|
|
4019 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
|
|
4020 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
|
|
4021 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
|
|
4022 Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
|
|
4023 this option. Note that this option can be changed at any time
|
|
4024 allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
|
|
4025 Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
|
|
4026
|
|
4027 *'langmenu'* *'lm'*
|
|
4028 'langmenu' 'lm' string (default "")
|
|
4029 global
|
|
4030 {not in Vi}
|
|
4031 {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and
|
|
4032 |+multi_lang| features}
|
|
4033 Language to use for menu translation. Tells which file is loaded
|
|
4034 from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
|
|
4035 "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"
|
|
4036 < (without the spaces). For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
|
|
4037 matter what $LANG is set to: >
|
|
4038 :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
|
|
4039 < When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
|
36
|
4040 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
7
|
4041 If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
|
|
4042 the English menus: >
|
|
4043 :set langmenu=none
|
|
4044 < This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
|
|
4045 detection or syntax highlighting. Once the menus are defined setting
|
|
4046 this option has no effect. But you could do this: >
|
|
4047 :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
|
|
4048 :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
|
|
4049 :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
|
|
4050 < Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
|
|
4051
|
|
4052 *'laststatus'* *'ls'*
|
|
4053 'laststatus' 'ls' number (default 1)
|
|
4054 global
|
|
4055 {not in Vi}
|
|
4056 The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
|
|
4057 status line:
|
|
4058 0: never
|
|
4059 1: only if there are at least two windows
|
|
4060 2: always
|
|
4061 The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
|
|
4062 windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
|
|
4063
|
|
4064 *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
|
|
4065 'lazyredraw' 'lz' boolean (default off)
|
|
4066 global
|
|
4067 {not in Vi}
|
|
4068 When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
|
|
4069 executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
|
10
|
4070 typed. Also, updating the window title is postponed. To force an
|
7
|
4071 update use |:redraw|.
|
|
4072
|
|
4073 *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
|
|
4074 'linebreak' 'lbr' boolean (default off)
|
|
4075 local to window
|
|
4076 {not in Vi}
|
|
4077 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
|
4078 feature}
|
|
4079 If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
|
|
4080 than at the last character that fits on the screen. Unlike
|
|
4081 'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
|
|
4082 it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents. The
|
|
4083 value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.
|
|
4084 This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
|
|
4085 Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
|
|
4086 with the right amount of white space.
|
|
4087
|
|
4088 *'lines'* *E593*
|
|
4089 'lines' number (default 24 or terminal height)
|
|
4090 global
|
|
4091 Number of lines of the Vim window.
|
|
4092 Normally you don't need to set this. It is done automatically by the
|
161
|
4093 terminal initialization code. Also see |posix-screen-size|.
|
7
|
4094 When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
|
|
4095 option will cause the window size to be changed. When you only want
|
|
4096 to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
|
|
4097 Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen. You can
|
|
4098 use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
|
|
4099 :set lines=999
|
571
|
4100 < Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.
|
|
4101 If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
|
7
|
4102 When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
|
|
4103 number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.
|
|
4104
|
|
4105 *'linespace'* *'lsp'*
|
|
4106 'linespace' 'lsp' number (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)
|
|
4107 global
|
|
4108 {not in Vi}
|
|
4109 {only in the GUI}
|
|
4110 Number of pixel lines inserted between characters. Useful if the font
|
|
4111 uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
|
|
4112 When non-zero there is room for underlining.
|
180
|
4113 With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have
|
|
4114 space for ascents and descents). Then it makes sense to set
|
|
4115 'linespace' to a negative value. This may cause display problems
|
|
4116 though!
|
7
|
4117
|
|
4118 *'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
|
|
4119 'lisp' boolean (default off)
|
|
4120 local to buffer
|
|
4121 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
|
|
4122 feature}
|
|
4123 Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
|
|
4124 the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of). Also happens with
|
|
4125 "cc" or "S". 'autoindent' must also be on for this to work. The 'p'
|
|
4126 flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
|
|
4127 better. Also see 'lispwords'.
|
|
4128 The '-' character is included in keyword characters. Redefines the
|
|
4129 "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
|
|
4130 calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
|
|
4131 This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
|
|
4132 {Vi: Does it a little bit differently}
|
|
4133
|
|
4134 *'lispwords'* *'lw'*
|
|
4135 'lispwords' 'lw' string (default is very long)
|
|
4136 global
|
|
4137 {not in Vi}
|
|
4138 {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
|
|
4139 feature}
|
|
4140 Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.
|
|
4141 |'lisp'|
|
|
4142
|
|
4143 *'list'* *'nolist'*
|
|
4144 'list' boolean (default off)
|
|
4145 local to window
|
|
4146 List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I, show end of line with $. Useful to
|
|
4147 see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks.
|
|
4148 Note that this will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or
|
|
4149 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'. See 'listchars' for
|
|
4150 changing the way tabs are displayed.
|
|
4151
|
|
4152 *'listchars'* *'lcs'*
|
|
4153 'listchars' 'lcs' string (default "eol:$")
|
|
4154 global
|
|
4155 {not in Vi}
|
10
|
4156 Strings to use in 'list' mode. It is a comma separated list of string
|
7
|
4157 settings.
|
|
4158 eol:c Character to show at the end of each line. When
|
|
4159 omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
|
|
4160 line.
|
|
4161 tab:xy Two characters to be used to show a Tab. The first
|
|
4162 char is used once. The second char is repeated to
|
|
4163 fill the space that the Tab normally occupies.
|
|
4164 "tab:>-" will show a Tab that takes four spaces as
|
|
4165 ">---". When omitted, a Tab is show as ^I.
|
10
|
4166 trail:c Character to show for trailing spaces. When omitted,
|
7
|
4167 trailing spaces are blank.
|
|
4168 extends:c Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
|
|
4169 off and the line continues beyond the right of the
|
|
4170 screen.
|
|
4171 precedes:c Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
|
|
4172 is off and there is text preceding the character
|
|
4173 visible in the first column.
|
13
|
4174 nbsp:c Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
|
|
4175 0xA0, 160). Left blank when omitted.
|
7
|
4176
|
10
|
4177 The characters ':' and ',' should not be used. UTF-8 characters can
|
7
|
4178 be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
|
|
4179 characters are allowed.
|
|
4180
|
|
4181 Examples: >
|
|
4182 :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
|
12
|
4183 :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
|
7
|
4184 :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
|
|
4185 < The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
|
12
|
4186 "precedes". "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail".
|
7
|
4187
|
|
4188 *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
|
|
4189 'loadplugins' 'lpl' boolean (default on)
|
|
4190 global
|
|
4191 {not in Vi}
|
|
4192 When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
|
|
4193 This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
|
|
4194 of plugins.
|
|
4195 Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
|
|
4196 reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
|
|
4197
|
|
4198 *'magic'* *'nomagic'*
|
|
4199 'magic' boolean (default on)
|
|
4200 global
|
|
4201 Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
|
|
4202 See |pattern|.
|
|
4203 NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep
|
|
4204 this option at the default "on". Only switch it off when working with
|
|
4205 old Vi scripts. In any other situation write patterns that work when
|
20
|
4206 'magic' is on. Include "\M" when you want to |/\M|.
|
7
|
4207
|
|
4208 *'makeef'* *'mef'*
|
|
4209 'makeef' 'mef' string (default: "")
|
|
4210 global
|
|
4211 {not in Vi}
|
|
4212 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
4213 feature}
|
|
4214 Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
|
|
4215 and the |:grep| command.
|
|
4216 When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
|
|
4217 When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
|
|
4218 unique. This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
|
|
4219 existing file.
|
|
4220 NOT used for the ":cf" command. See 'errorfile' for that.
|
|
4221 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
4222 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
4223 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
4224 security reasons.
|
|
4225
|
|
4226 *'makeprg'* *'mp'*
|
|
4227 'makeprg' 'mp' string (default "make", VMS: "MMS")
|
|
4228 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
4229 {not in Vi}
|
|
4230 Program to use for the ":make" command. See |:make_makeprg|. This
|
|
4231 option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded like
|
|
4232 when used in a command-line. Environment variables are expanded
|
|
4233 |:set_env|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces and
|
|
4234 backslashes. Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set"
|
|
4235 and once for the interpretation of a command. When you use a filter
|
|
4236 called "myfilter" do it like this: >
|
|
4237 :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
|
|
4238 < The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
|
|
4239 where the arguments will be included, for example: >
|
|
4240 :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
|
|
4241 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
4242 security reasons.
|
|
4243
|
|
4244 *'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
|
|
4245 'matchpairs' 'mps' string (default "(:),{:},[:]")
|
|
4246 local to buffer
|
|
4247 {not in Vi}
|
|
4248 Characters that form pairs. The |%| command jumps from one to the
|
10
|
4249 other. Currently only single character pairs are allowed, and they
|
7
|
4250 must be different. The characters must be separated by a colon. The
|
|
4251 pairs must be separated by a comma. Example for including '<' and '>'
|
|
4252 (HTML): >
|
|
4253 :set mps+=<:>
|
|
4254
|
|
4255 < A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
|
|
4256 assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
|
|
4257 :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
|
|
4258
|
|
4259 < For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
|
|
4260 the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|
|
|
4261
|
|
4262 *'matchtime'* *'mat'*
|
|
4263 'matchtime' 'mat' number (default 5)
|
|
4264 global
|
|
4265 {not in Vi}{in Nvi}
|
|
4266 Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
|
|
4267 set. Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
|
|
4268 set a time. This is to be compatible with Nvi.
|
|
4269
|
|
4270 *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
|
|
4271 'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd' number (default 100)
|
|
4272 global
|
|
4273 {not in Vi}
|
|
4274 Maximum depth of function calls for user functions. This normally
|
|
4275 catches endless recursion. When using a recursive function with
|
|
4276 more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number. But this will use
|
|
4277 more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
|
|
4278 See also |:function|.
|
|
4279
|
|
4280 *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
|
|
4281 'maxmapdepth' 'mmd' number (default 1000)
|
|
4282 global
|
|
4283 {not in Vi}
|
|
4284 Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
|
|
4285 character to be used. This normally catches endless mappings, like
|
|
4286 ":map x y" with ":map y x". It still does not catch ":map g wg",
|
|
4287 because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done. See also
|
|
4288 |key-mapping|.
|
|
4289
|
|
4290 *'maxmem'* *'mm'*
|
|
4291 'maxmem' 'mm' number (default between 256 to 5120 (system
|
|
4292 dependent) or half the amount of memory
|
|
4293 available)
|
|
4294 global
|
|
4295 {not in Vi}
|
|
4296 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer. When this
|
|
4297 limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
|
|
4298 other memory to be freed. Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work
|
|
4299 without a limit. Also see 'maxmemtot'.
|
|
4300
|
189
|
4301 *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'*
|
|
4302 'maxmempattern' 'mmp' number (default 1000)
|
|
4303 global
|
|
4304 {not in Vi}
|
|
4305 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching.
|
|
4306 Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit.
|
|
4307 *E363*
|
|
4308 When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message mostly behaves
|
|
4309 like CTRL-C was typed.
|
|
4310 Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very
|
|
4311 inefficient or too complex. This may already happen with the pattern
|
|
4312 "\(.\)*" on a very long line. ".*" works much better.
|
|
4313 Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit.
|
|
4314
|
7
|
4315 *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'*
|
|
4316 'maxmemtot' 'mmt' number (default between 2048 and 10240 (system
|
|
4317 dependent) or half the amount of memory
|
|
4318 available)
|
|
4319 global
|
|
4320 {not in Vi}
|
|
4321 Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for all buffers together.
|
10
|
4322 Maximum value 2000000. Use this to work without a limit. Also see
|
7
|
4323 'maxmem'.
|
|
4324
|
|
4325 *'menuitems'* *'mis'*
|
|
4326 'menuitems' 'mis' number (default 25)
|
|
4327 global
|
|
4328 {not in Vi}
|
|
4329 {not available when compiled without the |+menu|
|
|
4330 feature}
|
|
4331 Maximum number of items to use in a menu. Used for menus that are
|
|
4332 generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu. Changing this
|
|
4333 option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
|
|
4334
|
484
|
4335 *'mkspellmem'* *'msm'*
|
|
4336 'mkspellmem' 'msm' string (default "460000,2000,500")
|
|
4337 global
|
|
4338 {not in Vi}
|
|
4339 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
4340 feature}
|
|
4341 Parameters for |:mkspell|. This tunes when to start compressing the
|
|
4342 word tree. Compression can be slow when there are many words, but
|
|
4343 it's needed to avoid running out of memory. The amount of memory used
|
|
4344 per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why
|
|
4345 this tuning is complicated.
|
|
4346
|
|
4347 There are three numbers, separated by commas:
|
|
4348 {start},{inc},{added}
|
|
4349
|
|
4350 For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory. {start}
|
|
4351 gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any
|
|
4352 compression is done. It should be a bit smaller than the amount of
|
|
4353 memory that is available to Vim.
|
|
4354
|
|
4355 When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the
|
|
4356 amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another
|
|
4357 compression is done. A low number means compression is done after
|
|
4358 less words are added, which is slow. A high number means more memory
|
|
4359 will be allocated.
|
|
4360
|
|
4361 After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before
|
|
4362 the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra
|
|
4363 amount of memory is needed. A low number means there is a smaller
|
|
4364 chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's
|
|
4365 slower.
|
|
4366
|
|
4367 The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and
|
|
4368 Hungarian. The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte. If
|
|
4369 you have 1 Gbyte you could use: >
|
|
4370 :set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800
|
|
4371 < If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some
|
|
4372 languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to.
|
|
4373
|
7
|
4374 *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
|
|
4375 'modeline' 'ml' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
4376 local to buffer
|
|
4377 *'modelines'* *'mls'*
|
|
4378 'modelines' 'mls' number (default 5)
|
|
4379 global
|
|
4380 {not in Vi}
|
|
4381 If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
|
|
4382 checked for set commands. If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
|
|
4383 no lines are checked. See |modeline|.
|
|
4384 NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
4385 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
4386
|
|
4387 *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'*
|
|
4388 'modifiable' 'ma' boolean (default on)
|
|
4389 local to buffer
|
|
4390 {not in Vi} *E21*
|
|
4391 When off the buffer contents cannot be changed. The 'fileformat' and
|
|
4392 'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
|
|
4393 Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument.
|
|
4394
|
|
4395 *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
|
|
4396 'modified' 'mod' boolean (default off)
|
|
4397 local to buffer
|
|
4398 {not in Vi}
|
|
4399 When on, the buffer is considered to be modified. This option is set
|
|
4400 when:
|
|
4401 1. A change was made to the text since it was last written. Using the
|
|
4402 |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
|
|
4403 option. But undoing changes that were made before writing the
|
|
4404 buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
|
|
4405 when it was written.
|
|
4406 2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
|
|
4407 value. The original value is set when the buffer is read or
|
|
4408 written. A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
|
|
4409 values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
|
|
4410 reset.
|
|
4411 When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
|
|
4412 will be ignored.
|
|
4413
|
|
4414 *'more'* *'nomore'*
|
|
4415 'more' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
4416 global
|
|
4417 {not in Vi}
|
|
4418 When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled. You will get
|
|
4419 the |more-prompt|. When this option is off there are no pauses, the
|
|
4420 listing continues until finished.
|
|
4421 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
4422 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
4423
|
|
4424 *'mouse'* *E538*
|
|
4425 'mouse' string (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
|
|
4426 global
|
|
4427 {not in Vi}
|
|
4428 Enable the use of the mouse. Only works for certain terminals
|
|
4429 (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, and Linux console
|
|
4430 with gpm). For using the mouse in the GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
|
|
4431 The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
|
|
4432 n Normal mode
|
|
4433 v Visual mode
|
|
4434 i Insert mode
|
|
4435 c Command-line mode
|
|
4436 h all previous modes when editing a help file
|
|
4437 a all previous modes
|
|
4438 r for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
|
|
4439 Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
|
|
4440 :set mouse=a
|
|
4441 < When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
|
|
4442 modeless selection. This doesn't move the text cursor.
|
|
4443
|
|
4444 See |mouse-using|. Also see |'clipboard'|.
|
|
4445
|
|
4446 Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
|
10
|
4447 "* register if there is access to an X-server. The xterm handling of
|
7
|
4448 the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.
|
|
4449 Also see the 'clipboard' option.
|
|
4450
|
|
4451 *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
|
|
4452 'mousefocus' 'mousef' boolean (default off)
|
|
4453 global
|
|
4454 {not in Vi}
|
|
4455 {only works in the GUI}
|
|
4456 The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
|
|
4457 When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
|
|
4458 mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus. Off is the
|
|
4459 default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
|
|
4460 a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
|
|
4461
|
|
4462 *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
|
|
4463 'mousehide' 'mh' boolean (default on)
|
|
4464 global
|
|
4465 {not in Vi}
|
|
4466 {only works in the GUI}
|
|
4467 When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
|
|
4468 The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
|
|
4469
|
|
4470 *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
|
|
4471 'mousemodel' 'mousem' string (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)
|
|
4472 global
|
|
4473 {not in Vi}
|
|
4474 Sets the model to use for the mouse. The name mostly specifies what
|
|
4475 the right mouse button is used for:
|
|
4476 extend Right mouse button extends a selection. This works
|
|
4477 like in an xterm.
|
|
4478 popup Right mouse button pops up a menu. The shifted left
|
|
4479 mouse button extends a selection. This works like
|
233
|
4480 with Microsoft Windows.
|
7
|
4481 popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
|
|
4482 position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
|
|
4483 selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
|
|
4484 If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
|
233
|
4485 be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move. This implies of
|
7
|
4486 course, that right clicking outside a selection will
|
|
4487 end Visual mode.
|
|
4488 Overview of what button does what for each model:
|
|
4489 mouse extend popup(_setpos) ~
|
|
4490 left click place cursor place cursor
|
|
4491 left drag start selection start selection
|
|
4492 shift-left search word extend selection
|
|
4493 right click extend selection popup menu (place cursor)
|
|
4494 right drag extend selection -
|
|
4495 middle click paste paste
|
|
4496
|
|
4497 In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
|
|
4498 You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.
|
|
4499
|
|
4500 Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
|
|
4501 See |gui-mouse-mapping|. But mappings are NOT used for modeless
|
|
4502 selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).
|
|
4503
|
|
4504 The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
4505
|
|
4506 *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547*
|
|
4507 'mouseshape' 'mouses' string (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
|
233
|
4508 m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow")
|
7
|
4509 global
|
|
4510 {not in Vi}
|
|
4511 {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape|
|
|
4512 feature}
|
|
4513 This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
|
|
4514 different modes. The option is a comma separated list of parts, much
|
|
4515 like used for 'guicursor'. Each part consist of a mode/location-list
|
|
4516 and an argument-list:
|
|
4517 mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
|
|
4518 The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
|
|
4519 In a normal window: ~
|
|
4520 n Normal mode
|
|
4521 v Visual mode
|
|
4522 ve Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
|
|
4523 if not specified)
|
|
4524 o Operator-pending mode
|
|
4525 i Insert mode
|
|
4526 r Replace mode
|
|
4527
|
|
4528 Others: ~
|
|
4529 c appending to the command-line
|
|
4530 ci inserting in the command-line
|
|
4531 cr replacing in the command-line
|
|
4532 m at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
|
|
4533 ml idem, but cursor in the last line
|
|
4534 e any mode, pointer below last window
|
|
4535 s any mode, pointer on a status line
|
|
4536 sd any mode, while dragging a status line
|
|
4537 vs any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
|
|
4538 vd any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
|
|
4539 a everywhere
|
|
4540
|
|
4541 The shape is one of the following:
|
|
4542 avail name looks like ~
|
|
4543 w x arrow Normal mouse pointer
|
|
4544 w x blank no pointer at all (use with care!)
|
|
4545 w x beam I-beam
|
|
4546 w x updown up-down sizing arrows
|
|
4547 w x leftright left-right sizing arrows
|
|
4548 w x busy The system's usual busy pointer
|
|
4549 w x no The system's usual 'no input' pointer
|
|
4550 x udsizing indicates up-down resizing
|
|
4551 x lrsizing indicates left-right resizing
|
|
4552 x crosshair like a big thin +
|
|
4553 x hand1 black hand
|
|
4554 x hand2 white hand
|
|
4555 x pencil what you write with
|
|
4556 x question big ?
|
|
4557 x rightup-arrow arrow pointing right-up
|
|
4558 w x up-arrow arrow pointing up
|
|
4559 x <number> any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)
|
|
4560
|
|
4561 The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
|
|
4562 x for X11.
|
|
4563 Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
|
|
4564 pointer.
|
|
4565
|
|
4566 Example: >
|
|
4567 :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
|
|
4568 < will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
|
|
4569 indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
|
|
4570 clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
|
|
4571
|
|
4572 *'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
|
|
4573 'mousetime' 'mouset' number (default 500)
|
|
4574 global
|
|
4575 {not in Vi}
|
|
4576 Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm. Defines the maximum
|
|
4577 time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
|
|
4578 recognized as a multi click.
|
|
4579
|
14
|
4580 *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'*
|
|
4581 'mzquantum' 'mzq' number (default 100)
|
|
4582 global
|
|
4583 {not in Vi}
|
|
4584 {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme|
|
|
4585 feature}
|
|
4586 The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads.
|
|
4587 Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.
|
|
4588
|
7
|
4589 *'nrformats'* *'nf'*
|
|
4590 'nrformats' 'nf' string (default "octal,hex")
|
|
4591 local to buffer
|
|
4592 {not in Vi}
|
|
4593 This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
|
|
4594 CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
|
|
4595 respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
|
|
4596 alpha if included, single alphabetical characters will be
|
|
4597 incremented or decremented. This is useful for a list with a
|
|
4598 letter index a), b), etc.
|
|
4599 octal if included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
|
|
4600 to be octal. Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
|
|
4601 hex if included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
|
|
4602 considered to be hexadecimal. Example: Using CTRL-X on
|
|
4603 "0x100" results in "0x0ff".
|
|
4604 Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
|
|
4605 considered decimal. This also happens for numbers that are not
|
|
4606 recognized as octal or hex.
|
|
4607
|
|
4608 *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
|
|
4609 'number' 'nu' boolean (default off)
|
|
4610 local to window
|
|
4611 Print the line number in front of each line. When the 'n' option is
|
|
4612 excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
|
|
4613 line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).
|
13
|
4614 The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
|
|
4615 number.
|
7
|
4616 When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
|
|
4617 characters are put before the number.
|
|
4618 See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
|
|
4619
|
13
|
4620 *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
|
|
4621 'numberwidth' 'nuw' number (Vim default: 4 Vi default: 8)
|
|
4622 local to window
|
14
|
4623 {not in Vi}
|
|
4624 {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak|
|
|
4625 feature}
|
13
|
4626 Minimal number of columns to use for the line number. Only relevant
|
|
4627 when the 'number' option is set.
|
|
4628 Since one space is always between the number and the text, there is
|
|
4629 one less character for the number itself.
|
|
4630 The value is the minimum width. A bigger width is used when needed to
|
|
4631 fit the highest line number in the buffer. Thus with the Vim default
|
|
4632 of 4 there is room for a line number up to 999. When the buffer has
|
|
4633 1000 lines five columns will be used.
|
|
4634 The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10.
|
|
4635 NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
4636
|
523
|
4637 *'omnifunc'* *'ofu'*
|
|
4638 'omnifunc' 'ofu' string (default: empty)
|
502
|
4639 local to buffer
|
|
4640 {not in Vi}
|
|
4641 {not available when compiled without the +eval
|
|
4642 or +insert_expand feature}
|
|
4643 This option specifies a function to be used for CTRL-X CTRL-O
|
|
4644 completion. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
|
|
4645
|
|
4646 For the use of the function see 'completefunc'.
|
|
4647
|
|
4648
|
593
|
4649 *'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'*
|
|
4650 'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string (default: empty)
|
|
4651 global
|
|
4652 {not in Vi}
|
|
4653 This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator.
|
|
4654 See |:map-operator| for more info and an example.
|
|
4655
|
|
4656 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
4657 security reasons.
|
|
4658
|
|
4659
|
7
|
4660 *'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366*
|
|
4661 'osfiletype' 'oft' string (RISC-OS default: "Text",
|
|
4662 others default: "")
|
|
4663 local to buffer
|
|
4664 {not in Vi}
|
|
4665 {only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype|
|
|
4666 feature}
|
|
4667 Some operating systems store extra information about files besides
|
|
4668 name, datestamp and permissions. This option contains the extra
|
|
4669 information, the nature of which will vary between systems.
|
|
4670 The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and
|
|
4671 use to set the file type when file is written.
|
|
4672 It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands.
|
|
4673 |autocmd-osfiletypes|
|
|
4674
|
|
4675 *'paragraphs'* *'para'*
|
|
4676 'paragraphs' 'para' string (default "IPLPPPQPP LIpplpipbp")
|
|
4677 global
|
|
4678 Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs. These are pairs
|
|
4679 of two letters (see |object-motions|).
|
|
4680
|
|
4681 *'paste'* *'nopaste'*
|
|
4682 'paste' boolean (default off)
|
|
4683 global
|
|
4684 {not in Vi}
|
10
|
4685 Put Vim in Paste mode. This is useful if you want to cut or copy
|
|
4686 some text from one window and paste it in Vim. This will avoid
|
7
|
4687 unexpected effects.
|
|
4688 Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim
|
10
|
4689 cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text. In the GUI, Vim
|
7
|
4690 knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'
|
|
4691 being set. The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the
|
|
4692 mouse clicks itself.
|
148
|
4693 This option is reset when starting the GUI. Thus if you set it in
|
|
4694 your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI. Setting
|
|
4695 'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button
|
|
4696 will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping.
|
7
|
4697 When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
|
|
4698 - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
|
|
4699 - abbreviations are disabled
|
|
4700 - 'textwidth' is set to 0
|
|
4701 - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
|
|
4702 - 'autoindent' is reset
|
|
4703 - 'smartindent' is reset
|
|
4704 - 'softtabstop' is set to 0
|
|
4705 - 'revins' is reset
|
|
4706 - 'ruler' is reset
|
|
4707 - 'showmatch' is reset
|
|
4708 - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
|
|
4709 These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
|
|
4710 - 'lisp'
|
|
4711 - 'indentexpr'
|
|
4712 - 'cindent'
|
|
4713 NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
|
|
4714 on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
|
|
4715 settings again, causing trouble when pasting text. You might want to
|
|
4716 set the 'paste' option again.
|
|
4717 When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to
|
|
4718 the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.
|
|
4719 Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.
|
|
4720 Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use
|
|
4721 the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.
|
|
4722
|
|
4723 *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'*
|
|
4724 'pastetoggle' 'pt' string (default "")
|
|
4725 global
|
|
4726 {not in Vi}
|
|
4727 When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'
|
|
4728 option. This is like specifying a mapping: >
|
|
4729 :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>
|
|
4730 < Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.
|
|
4731 The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.
|
|
4732 'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in
|
|
4733 Command-line mode.
|
|
4734 Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'. However,
|
|
4735 when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do
|
|
4736 this: >
|
|
4737 :map <F10> :set paste<CR>
|
|
4738 :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>
|
|
4739 :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>
|
|
4740 :imap <F11> <nop>
|
|
4741 :set pastetoggle=<F11>
|
|
4742 < This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.
|
|
4743 Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste
|
|
4744 mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key
|
|
4745 sequence.
|
|
4746
|
|
4747 *'pex'* *'patchexpr'*
|
|
4748 'patchexpr' 'pex' string (default "")
|
|
4749 global
|
|
4750 {not in Vi}
|
|
4751 {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
|
|
4752 feature}
|
|
4753 Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
|
10
|
4754 the resulting new version of the file. See |diff-patchexpr|.
|
7
|
4755
|
|
4756 *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
|
|
4757 'patchmode' 'pm' string (default "")
|
|
4758 global
|
|
4759 {not in Vi}
|
|
4760 When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept. This can be used
|
|
4761 to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
|
|
4762 source distribution. Only the first time that a file is written a
|
|
4763 copy of the original file will be kept. The name of the copy is the
|
|
4764 name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
|
|
4765 appended. This option should start with a dot. Use a string like
|
|
4766 ".org". 'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
|
|
4767 backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
|
|
4768 been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
|
|
4769 backup file). If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
|
|
4770 created.
|
|
4771 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
|
|
4772 Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
|
|
4773 end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
|
|
4774 recognized as a compressed file.
|
36
|
4775 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
7
|
4776
|
|
4777 *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
|
|
4778 'path' 'pa' string (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
|
|
4779 on OS/2: ".,/emx/include,,"
|
|
4780 other systems: ".,,")
|
|
4781 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
4782 {not in Vi}
|
|
4783 This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
|
|
4784 |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find| and other commands, provided that the file
|
|
4785 being searched for has a relative path (not starting with '/'). The
|
|
4786 directories in the 'path' option may be relative or absolute.
|
|
4787 - Use commas to separate directory names: >
|
|
4788 :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
|
|
4789 < - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards
|
|
4790 compatibility with version 3.0). To have a space in a directory
|
|
4791 name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: >
|
|
4792 :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
|
|
4793 < - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
|
|
4794 backslash: >
|
|
4795 :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
|
|
4796 < - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
|
|
4797 :set path=.
|
|
4798 < - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
|
|
4799 commas: >
|
|
4800 :set path=,,
|
|
4801 < - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
|
|
4802 - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
4803 - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used. For example, adding
|
|
4804 "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
|
|
4805 - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree:
|
|
4806 1) "*" matches a sequence of characters, e.g.: >
|
|
4807 :set path=/usr/include/*
|
|
4808 < means all subdirectories in /usr/include (but not /usr/include
|
|
4809 itself). >
|
|
4810 :set path=/usr/*c
|
|
4811 < matches /usr/doc and /usr/src.
|
|
4812 2) "**" matches a subtree, up to 100 directories deep. Example: >
|
|
4813 :set path=/home/user_x/src/**
|
|
4814 < means search in the whole subtree under "/home/usr_x/src".
|
|
4815 3) If the path ends with a ';', this path is the startpoint
|
|
4816 for upward search.
|
|
4817 See |file-searching| for more info and exact syntax.
|
|
4818 {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
|
|
4819 - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
|
|
4820 :set path=.,c:\\include
|
|
4821 < Or just use '/' instead: >
|
|
4822 :set path=.,c:/include
|
|
4823 < Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
|
|
4824 the file!
|
10
|
4825 The maximum length is limited. How much depends on the system, mostly
|
7
|
4826 it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
|
|
4827 You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
|
|
4828 'path', see |:checkpath|.
|
|
4829 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
4830 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
4831 uses another default. To remove the current directory use: >
|
|
4832 :set path-=
|
|
4833 < To add the current directory use: >
|
|
4834 :set path+=
|
|
4835 < To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
|
|
4836 separator. Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
|
|
4837 names are separated with a semi-colon: >
|
|
4838 :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
|
|
4839 < Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used. Note that
|
|
4840 this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
|
|
4841
|
|
4842 *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
|
|
4843 'preserveindent' 'pi' boolean (default off)
|
|
4844 local to buffer
|
|
4845 {not in Vi}
|
|
4846 When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
|
|
4847 indent structure as possible. Normally the indent is replaced by a
|
|
4848 series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
|
|
4849 enabled, in which case only spaces are used). Enabling this option
|
|
4850 means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
|
|
4851 for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
|
|
4852 NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
|
|
4853 tabs and spaces. You might not like this.
|
|
4854 NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
4855 Also see 'copyindent'.
|
|
4856 Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
|
|
4857
|
|
4858 *'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
|
|
4859 'previewheight' 'pvh' number (default 12)
|
|
4860 global
|
|
4861 {not in Vi}
|
|
4862 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
|
|
4863 |+quickfix| feature}
|
|
4864 Default height for a preview window. Used for |:ptag| and associated
|
|
4865 commands. Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
|
|
4866
|
|
4867 *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'*
|
|
4868 *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
|
|
4869 'previewwindow' 'pvw' boolean (default off)
|
|
4870 local to window
|
|
4871 {not in Vi}
|
|
4872 {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
|
|
4873 |+quickfix| feature}
|
10
|
4874 Identifies the preview window. Only one window can have this option
|
7
|
4875 set. It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
|
|
4876 |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
|
|
4877
|
|
4878 *'printdevice'* *'pdev'*
|
|
4879 'printdevice' 'pdev' string (default empty)
|
|
4880 global
|
|
4881 {not in Vi}
|
|
4882 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
4883 feature}
|
15
|
4884 The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|.
|
|
4885 See |pdev-option|.
|
36
|
4886 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
4887 security reasons.
|
15
|
4888
|
|
4889 *'printencoding'* *'penc'*
|
|
4890 'printencoding' 'penc' String (default empty, except for some systems)
|
7
|
4891 global
|
|
4892 {not in Vi}
|
|
4893 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
4894 and |+postscript| features}
|
15
|
4895 Sets the character encoding used when printing.
|
|
4896 See |penc-option|.
|
7
|
4897
|
|
4898 *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'*
|
|
4899 'printexpr' 'pexpr' String (default: see below)
|
|
4900 global
|
|
4901 {not in Vi}
|
|
4902 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
4903 and |+postscript| features}
|
15
|
4904 Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|.
|
|
4905 See |pexpr-option|.
|
|
4906
|
|
4907 *'printfont'* *'pfn'*
|
7
|
4908 'printfont' 'pfn' string (default "courier")
|
|
4909 global
|
|
4910 {not in Vi}
|
|
4911 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
4912 feature}
|
15
|
4913 The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|.
|
|
4914 See |pfn-option|.
|
7
|
4915
|
|
4916 *'printheader'* *'pheader'*
|
|
4917 'printheader' 'pheader' string (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")
|
|
4918 global
|
|
4919 {not in Vi}
|
|
4920 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
|
|
4921 feature}
|
15
|
4922 The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output.
|
|
4923 See |pheader-option|.
|
|
4924
|
|
4925 *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'*
|
|
4926 'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs' string (default "")
|
|
4927 global
|
|
4928 {not in Vi}
|
180
|
4929 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|,
|
|
4930 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features}
|
15
|
4931 The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
|
|
4932 See |pmbcs-option|.
|
|
4933
|
|
4934 *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'*
|
|
4935 'printmbfont' 'pmbfn' string (default "")
|
|
4936 global
|
|
4937 {not in Vi}
|
180
|
4938 {only available when compiled with the |+printer|,
|
|
4939 |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features}
|
15
|
4940 List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
|
|
4941 See |pmbfn-option|.
|
7
|
4942
|
|
4943 *'printoptions'* *'popt'*
|
|
4944 'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")
|
|
4945 global
|
|
4946 {not in Vi}
|
|
4947 {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature}
|
15
|
4948 List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|.
|
|
4949 See |popt-option|.
|
|
4950
|
168
|
4951 *'prompt'* *'noprompt'*
|
|
4952 'prompt' boolean (default on)
|
|
4953 global
|
|
4954 When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode.
|
|
4955
|
140
|
4956 *'quoteescape'* *'qe'*
|
12
|
4957 'quoteescape' 'qe' string (default "\")
|
|
4958 local to buffer
|
|
4959 {not in Vi}
|
|
4960 The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string. Used for
|
|
4961 objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
|
|
4962 When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
|
|
4963 the following character will be skipped. The default value makes the
|
|
4964 text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.
|
|
4965
|
7
|
4966 *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
|
|
4967 'readonly' 'ro' boolean (default off)
|
|
4968 local to buffer
|
|
4969 If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'. Protects you from
|
|
4970 accidentally overwriting a file. Default on when Vim is started
|
|
4971 in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
|
164
|
4972 When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current
|
|
4973 buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.
|
7
|
4974 {not in Vi:} When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is
|
164
|
4975 set for the newly edited buffer.
|
7
|
4976
|
|
4977 *'remap'* *'noremap'*
|
|
4978 'remap' boolean (default on)
|
|
4979 global
|
|
4980 Allows for mappings to work recursively. If you do not want this for
|
|
4981 a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
|
|
4982
|
|
4983 *'report'*
|
|
4984 'report' number (default 2)
|
|
4985 global
|
|
4986 Threshold for reporting number of lines changed. When the number of
|
|
4987 changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
|
|
4988 ":" commands. If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
|
|
4989 For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
|
|
4990 instead of the number of lines.
|
|
4991
|
|
4992 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'*
|
|
4993 'restorescreen' 'rs' boolean (default on)
|
|
4994 global
|
|
4995 {not in Vi} {only in Windows 95/NT console version}
|
|
4996 When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim. This also
|
|
4997 happens when executing external commands.
|
|
4998
|
|
4999 For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'
|
|
5000 options in your .vimrc. To disable restoring:
|
|
5001 set t_ti= t_te=
|
|
5002 To enable restoring (for an xterm):
|
|
5003 set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8
|
|
5004 (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)
|
|
5005
|
|
5006 *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
|
|
5007 'revins' 'ri' boolean (default off)
|
|
5008 global
|
|
5009 {not in Vi}
|
|
5010 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
5011 feature}
|
|
5012 Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards. See "typing
|
|
5013 backwards" |ins-reverse|. This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
|
|
5014 command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
|
|
5015 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.
|
|
5016
|
|
5017 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
|
|
5018 'rightleft' 'rl' boolean (default off)
|
|
5019 local to window
|
|
5020 {not in Vi}
|
|
5021 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
5022 feature}
|
|
5023 When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
|
|
5024 that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
|
|
5025 Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
|
|
5026 are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
|
|
5027 This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
|
|
5028 simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
|
|
5029 useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
|
|
5030 and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
|
|
5031 in different windows). Also see |rileft.txt|.
|
|
5032
|
|
5033 *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'*
|
|
5034 'rightleftcmd' 'rlc' string (default "search")
|
|
5035 local to window
|
|
5036 {not in Vi}
|
|
5037 {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
|
|
5038 feature}
|
|
5039 Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
|
|
5040 right-to-left mode for a group of commands:
|
|
5041
|
|
5042 search "/" and "?" commands
|
|
5043
|
|
5044 This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
|
|
5045 The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
|
|
5046
|
|
5047 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
|
|
5048 'ruler' 'ru' boolean (default off)
|
|
5049 global
|
|
5050 {not in Vi}
|
|
5051 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
5052 |+cmdline_info| feature}
|
|
5053 Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
|
10
|
5054 comma. When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
|
7
|
5055 text in the file is shown on the far right:
|
|
5056 Top first line is visible
|
|
5057 Bot last line is visible
|
|
5058 All first and last line are visible
|
|
5059 45% relative position in the file
|
|
5060 If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
|
10
|
5061 Each window has its own ruler. If a window has a status line, the
|
7
|
5062 ruler is shown there. Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the
|
233
|
5063 screen. If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty),
|
7
|
5064 this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'
|
|
5065 If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
|
|
5066 bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both
|
|
5067 the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
|
|
5068 separated with a dash.
|
|
5069 For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
|
|
5070 For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
|
|
5071 This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
5072 If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
|
|
5073 you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
|
|
5074 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5075
|
|
5076 *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
|
|
5077 'rulerformat' 'ruf' string (default empty)
|
|
5078 global
|
|
5079 {not in Vi}
|
|
5080 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
|
|
5081 feature}
|
|
5082 When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
|
|
5083 string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
|
|
5084 The format of this option, is like that of 'statusline'.
|
|
5085 The default ruler width is 17 characters. To make the ruler 15
|
|
5086 characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
|
|
5087 Example: >
|
|
5088 :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
|
|
5089 <
|
|
5090 *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
|
|
5091 'runtimepath' 'rtp' string (default:
|
|
5092 Unix: "$HOME/.vim,
|
|
5093 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
5094 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
5095 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
|
5096 $HOME/.vim/after"
|
|
5097 Amiga: "home:vimfiles,
|
|
5098 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
5099 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
5100 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
|
5101 home:vimfiles/after"
|
|
5102 PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,
|
|
5103 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
5104 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
5105 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
|
5106 $HOME/vimfiles/after"
|
|
5107 Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,
|
|
5108 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
5109 $VIM:vimfiles:after"
|
|
5110 RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,
|
|
5111 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
5112 Choices:vimfiles/after"
|
|
5113 VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,
|
|
5114 $VIM/vimfiles,
|
|
5115 $VIMRUNTIME,
|
|
5116 $VIM/vimfiles/after,
|
233
|
5117 sys$login:vimfiles/after")
|
7
|
5118 global
|
|
5119 {not in Vi}
|
|
5120 This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime
|
|
5121 files:
|
|
5122 filetype.vim filetypes by file name |new-filetype|
|
|
5123 scripts.vim filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts|
|
164
|
5124 autoload/ automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions|
|
7
|
5125 colors/ color scheme files |:colorscheme|
|
|
5126 compiler/ compiler files |:compiler|
|
|
5127 doc/ documentation |write-local-help|
|
|
5128 ftplugin/ filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
|
|
5129 indent/ indent scripts |indent-expression|
|
|
5130 keymap/ key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
|
|
5131 lang/ menu translations |:menutrans|
|
|
5132 menu.vim GUI menus |menu.vim|
|
|
5133 plugin/ plugin scripts |write-plugin|
|
|
5134 print/ files for printing |postscript-print-encoding|
|
|
5135 syntax/ syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
|
|
5136 tutor/ files for vimtutor |tutor|
|
|
5137
|
|
5138 And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.
|
|
5139
|
|
5140 The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:
|
|
5141 1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.
|
|
5142 2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system
|
|
5143 administrator.
|
|
5144 3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.
|
|
5145 *after-directory*
|
|
5146 4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory. This is
|
|
5147 for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed
|
|
5148 defaults (rarely needed)
|
|
5149 5. In the "after" directory in your home directory. This is for
|
|
5150 personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
|
|
5151 or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
|
|
5152
|
|
5153 Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed. Normal
|
|
5154 wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
|
10
|
5155 runtime files. For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
|
7
|
5156 wildcards.
|
|
5157 See |:runtime|.
|
|
5158 Example: >
|
|
5159 :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
|
|
5160 < This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
|
|
5161 personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a
|
|
5162 group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime
|
|
5163 files).
|
|
5164 You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the
|
|
5165 distributed runtime files. You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME
|
|
5166 to find files which replace a distributed runtime files. You can put
|
|
5167 a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
|
|
5168 runtime files.
|
|
5169 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5170 security reasons.
|
|
5171
|
|
5172 *'scroll'* *'scr'*
|
|
5173 'scroll' 'scr' number (default: half the window height)
|
|
5174 local to window
|
|
5175 Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands. Will be
|
|
5176 set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
|
|
5177 changes. If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
|
10
|
5178 be used as the new value for 'scroll'. Reset to half the window
|
7
|
5179 height with ":set scroll=0". {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives
|
|
5180 the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference
|
|
5181 when lines wrap}
|
|
5182
|
|
5183 *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
|
|
5184 'scrollbind' 'scb' boolean (default off)
|
|
5185 local to window
|
|
5186 {not in Vi}
|
|
5187 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
|
|
5188 feature}
|
|
5189 See also |scroll-binding|. When this option is set, the current
|
|
5190 window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
|
|
5191 this option set) scroll. This option is useful for viewing the
|
|
5192 differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
|
|
5193 See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
|
|
5194 interpreted.
|
|
5195 This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
|
|
5196 file. This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
|
|
5197 with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
|
|
5198
|
|
5199 *'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
|
|
5200 'scrolljump' 'sj' number (default 1)
|
|
5201 global
|
|
5202 {not in Vi}
|
|
5203 Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
|
|
5204 screen (e.g., with "j"). Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
|
|
5205 CTRL-D). Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
|
532
|
5206 When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the
|
|
5207 percentage of the window height. Thus -50 scrolls half the window
|
|
5208 height.
|
7
|
5209 NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5210
|
|
5211 *'scrolloff'* *'so'*
|
|
5212 'scrolloff' 'so' number (default 0)
|
|
5213 global
|
|
5214 {not in Vi}
|
|
5215 Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
|
|
5216 This will make some context visible around where you are working. If
|
|
5217 you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
|
|
5218 in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
|
|
5219 when long lines wrap).
|
|
5220 For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
|
|
5221 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5222
|
|
5223 *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
|
|
5224 'scrollopt' 'sbo' string (default "ver,jump")
|
|
5225 global
|
|
5226 {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
|
|
5227 feature}
|
|
5228 {not in Vi}
|
|
5229 This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
|
236
|
5230 'scrollbind' windows should behave. 'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
|
|
5231 Options.
|
7
|
5232 The following words are available:
|
|
5233 ver Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
|
5234 hor Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
|
|
5235 jump Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
|
|
5236 scrolling. This offset is the difference in the first
|
|
5237 displayed line of the bound windows. When moving
|
|
5238 around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
|
|
5239 reach a position before the start or after the end of
|
|
5240 the buffer. The offset is not changed though, when
|
|
5241 moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
|
|
5242 to the desired position when possible.
|
|
5243 When now making that window the current one, two
|
|
5244 things can be done with the relative offset:
|
|
5245 1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
|
|
5246 adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
|
|
5247 window. When going back to the other window, the
|
|
5248 the new relative offset will be used.
|
|
5249 2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
|
|
5250 scrolled to keep the same relative offset. When
|
|
5251 going back to the other window, it still uses the
|
|
5252 same relative offset.
|
|
5253 Also see |scroll-binding|.
|
|
5254
|
|
5255 *'sections'* *'sect'*
|
|
5256 'sections' 'sect' string (default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
|
|
5257 global
|
|
5258 Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections. These are pairs of
|
|
5259 two letters (See |object-motions|). The default makes a section start
|
|
5260 at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
|
|
5261
|
|
5262 *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523*
|
|
5263 'secure' boolean (default off)
|
|
5264 global
|
|
5265 {not in Vi}
|
|
5266 When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in
|
|
5267 ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are
|
|
5268 displayed. Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into
|
|
5269 problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off. On Unix this option is
|
|
5270 only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you. This can be
|
10
|
5271 dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown". You better set
|
7
|
5272 'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.
|
|
5273 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5274 security reasons.
|
|
5275
|
|
5276 *'selection'* *'sel'*
|
|
5277 'selection' 'sel' string (default "inclusive")
|
|
5278 global
|
|
5279 {not in Vi}
|
|
5280 This option defines the behavior of the selection. It is only used
|
|
5281 in Visual and Select mode.
|
|
5282 Possible values:
|
|
5283 value past line inclusive ~
|
|
5284 old no yes
|
|
5285 inclusive yes yes
|
|
5286 exclusive yes no
|
|
5287 "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
|
|
5288 character past the line.
|
|
5289 "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
|
|
5290 in an operation. For example, when "x" is used to delete the
|
|
5291 selection.
|
|
5292 Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end
|
|
5293 backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when
|
|
5294 starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
|
|
5295
|
|
5296 The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
5297
|
|
5298 *'selectmode'* *'slm'*
|
|
5299 'selectmode' 'slm' string (default "")
|
|
5300 global
|
|
5301 {not in Vi}
|
|
5302 This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start
|
|
5303 Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
|
|
5304 Possible values:
|
|
5305 mouse when using the mouse
|
|
5306 key when using shifted special keys
|
|
5307 cmd when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
|
|
5308 See |Select-mode|.
|
|
5309 The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command.
|
|
5310
|
|
5311 *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
|
|
5312 'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
|
|
5313 help,options,winsize")
|
|
5314 global
|
|
5315 {not in Vi}
|
|
5316 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
|
5317 feature}
|
|
5318 Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command. It is a comma
|
|
5319 separated list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring
|
|
5320 something:
|
|
5321 word save and restore ~
|
|
5322 blank empty windows
|
|
5323 buffers hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
|
|
5324 curdir the current directory
|
|
5325 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
|
|
5326 fold options
|
|
5327 globals global variables that start with an uppercase letter
|
75
|
5328 and contain at least one lowercase letter. Only
|
|
5329 String and Number types are stored.
|
7
|
5330 help the help window
|
|
5331 localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
|
|
5332 global values for local options)
|
|
5333 options all options and mappings (also global values for local
|
|
5334 options)
|
|
5335 resize size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
|
|
5336 sesdir the directory in which the session file is located
|
|
5337 will become the current directory (useful with
|
|
5338 projects accessed over a network from different
|
|
5339 systems)
|
|
5340 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
|
|
5341 slashes
|
|
5342 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
|
|
5343 on Windows or DOS
|
|
5344 winpos position of the whole Vim window
|
|
5345 winsize window sizes
|
|
5346
|
|
5347 Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".
|
|
5348 When "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with
|
|
5349 absolute paths.
|
|
5350 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files
|
|
5351 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
|
|
5352 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
|
|
5353
|
|
5354 *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
|
|
5355 'shell' 'sh' string (default $SHELL or "sh",
|
|
5356 MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or
|
|
5357 "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")
|
|
5358 global
|
|
5359 Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands. When changing the
|
|
5360 value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
|
|
5361 'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
|
10
|
5362 It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g. "csh -f".
|
7
|
5363 See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
5364 Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
5365 If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
|
|
5366 it in quotes. Example: >
|
|
5367 :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
|
|
5368 < Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
|
10
|
5369 each space (to avoid ending the option value). Also note that the
|
7
|
5370 "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
|
|
5371 name. And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
|
|
5372 separators.
|
|
5373 For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment
|
|
5374 variable to change the way external commands are executed. See the
|
|
5375 libc.inf file of DJGPP.
|
|
5376 Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
|
|
5377 included. Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
|
|
5378 works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
|
|
5379 filtering).
|
|
5380 For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is
|
|
5381 changed to "C:\". To avoid this set 'shell' like this: >
|
|
5382 :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos
|
|
5383 < This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5384 security reasons.
|
|
5385
|
|
5386 *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
|
|
5387 'shellcmdflag' 'shcf' string (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
|
|
5388 does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
|
|
5389 global
|
|
5390 {not in Vi}
|
|
5391 Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
|
|
5392 "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir". For the MS-DOS-like
|
|
5393 systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
|
|
5394 reduce the need to set this option by the user. It's not used for
|
|
5395 OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself). See |option-backslash| about
|
|
5396 including spaces and backslashes. See |dos-shell|.
|
|
5397 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5398 security reasons.
|
|
5399
|
|
5400 *'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
|
|
5401 'shellpipe' 'sp' string (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
|
|
5402 global
|
|
5403 {not in Vi}
|
|
5404 {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
|
|
5405 feature}
|
|
5406 String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
|
10
|
5407 error file. See also |:make_makeprg|. See |option-backslash| about
|
7
|
5408 including spaces and backslashes.
|
|
5409 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
|
|
5410 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
|
|
5411 of this option).
|
|
5412 For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">". The output is directly
|
|
5413 saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.
|
|
5414 For Unix the default it "| tee". The stdout of the compiler is saved
|
|
5415 in a file and echoed to the screen. If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
|
|
5416 "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee". If the
|
|
5417 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes
|
|
5418 "2>&1| tee". This means that stderr is also included.
|
|
5419 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
|
|
5420 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
|
|
5421 there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
|
|
5422 explicitly set before.
|
|
5423 When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
|
|
5424 ":make" output will be done. This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
|
|
5425 that writes to 'makeef' by itself. If you want no piping, but do
|
|
5426 want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
|
|
5427 Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
|
|
5428 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
|
|
5429 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
|
|
5430 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5431 security reasons.
|
|
5432
|
|
5433 *'shellquote'* *'shq'*
|
|
5434 'shellquote' 'shq' string (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
|
|
5435 contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
|
|
5436 global
|
|
5437 {not in Vi}
|
|
5438 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
|
|
5439 the "!" and ":!" commands. The redirection is kept outside of the
|
|
5440 quoting. See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection. It's
|
|
5441 probably not useful to set both options.
|
|
5442 This is an empty string by default. Only known to be useful for
|
|
5443 third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
|
|
5444 or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted according
|
|
5445 the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
|
|
5446 user. See |dos-shell|.
|
|
5447 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5448 security reasons.
|
|
5449
|
|
5450 *'shellredir'* *'srr'*
|
|
5451 'shellredir' 'srr' string (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
|
|
5452 global
|
|
5453 {not in Vi}
|
|
5454 String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
|
|
5455 file. See also |:!|. See |option-backslash| about including spaces
|
|
5456 and backslashes.
|
|
5457 The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
|
|
5458 (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
|
|
5459 of this option).
|
|
5460 The default is ">". For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"
|
|
5461 or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&". If the
|
|
5462 'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes
|
|
5463 ">%s 2>&1". This means that stderr is also included.
|
|
5464 For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked
|
|
5465 for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1". Also, the same names with
|
|
5466 ".exe" appended are checked for.
|
|
5467 The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
|
|
5468 and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
|
|
5469 there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
|
|
5470 explicitly set before.
|
|
5471 In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
|
|
5472 become obsolete (at least for Unix).
|
|
5473 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5474 security reasons.
|
|
5475
|
|
5476 *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
|
|
5477 'shellslash' 'ssl' boolean (default off)
|
|
5478 global
|
|
5479 {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}
|
|
5480 When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names. This is
|
|
5481 useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or
|
|
5482 cmd.exe. Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to
|
|
5483 forward slashes by Vim.
|
|
5484 Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
|
|
5485 existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
|
|
5486 any file for best results. This might change in the future.
|
|
5487 'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
|
|
5488 separator. To test if this is so use: >
|
|
5489 if exists('+shellslash')
|
|
5490 <
|
168
|
5491 *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'*
|
|
5492 'shelltemp' 'stmp' boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on)
|
|
5493 global
|
|
5494 {not in Vi}
|
|
5495 When on, use temp files for shell commands. When off use a pipe.
|
|
5496 When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
|
|
5497 Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix. You can check it with: >
|
|
5498 :if has("filterpipe")
|
|
5499 < The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
|
|
5500 and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
|
|
5501 The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding
|
|
5502 can be detected.
|
|
5503 The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
|
|
5504 |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
|
|
5505 'shelltemp' is off.
|
|
5506
|
7
|
5507 *'shelltype'* *'st'*
|
|
5508 'shelltype' 'st' number (default 0)
|
|
5509 global
|
|
5510 {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga}
|
|
5511 On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work
|
|
5512 which use a shell.
|
|
5513 0 and 1: always use the shell
|
|
5514 2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines
|
|
5515 4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command
|
|
5516 When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.
|
|
5517
|
|
5518 0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
|
|
5519 1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands
|
|
5520
|
|
5521 *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
|
|
5522 'shellxquote' 'sxq' string (default: "";
|
|
5523 for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
|
|
5524 somewhere: "\""
|
|
5525 for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
|
|
5526 global
|
|
5527 {not in Vi}
|
|
5528 Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
|
|
5529 the "!" and ":!" commands. Includes the redirection. See
|
|
5530 'shellquote' to exclude the redirection. It's probably not useful
|
|
5531 to set both options.
|
|
5532 This is an empty string by default. Known to be useful for
|
|
5533 third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
|
|
5534 Shell or bash, where it should be "\"". The default is adjusted
|
|
5535 according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
|
|
5536 by the user. See |dos-shell|.
|
|
5537 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5538 security reasons.
|
|
5539
|
|
5540 *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
|
|
5541 'shiftround' 'sr' boolean (default off)
|
|
5542 global
|
|
5543 {not in Vi}
|
|
5544 Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'. Applies to > and <
|
|
5545 commands. CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
|
|
5546 a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
|
|
5547 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5548
|
|
5549 *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
|
|
5550 'shiftwidth' 'sw' number (default 8)
|
|
5551 local to buffer
|
10
|
5552 Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent. Used for
|
7
|
5553 |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
|
|
5554
|
|
5555 *'shortmess'* *'shm'*
|
168
|
5556 'shortmess' 'shm' string (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "",
|
|
5557 POSIX default: "A")
|
7
|
5558 global
|
|
5559 {not in Vi}
|
|
5560 This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
|
|
5561 messages, for example with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
|
|
5562 It is a list of flags:
|
|
5563 flag meaning when present ~
|
|
5564 f use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"
|
|
5565 i use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"
|
|
5566 l use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"
|
|
5567 m use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"
|
|
5568 n use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"
|
|
5569 r use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"
|
|
5570 w use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message
|
|
5571 and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
|
|
5572 x use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of
|
|
5573 "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".
|
|
5574 a all of the above abbreviations
|
|
5575
|
|
5576 o overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message
|
|
5577 for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)
|
|
5578 O message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.
|
|
5579 Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").
|
|
5580 s don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search
|
|
5581 hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages
|
|
5582 t truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit
|
|
5583 on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.
|
|
5584 Ignored in Ex mode.
|
|
5585 T truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to
|
233
|
5586 fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle.
|
7
|
5587 Ignored in Ex mode.
|
|
5588 W don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file
|
|
5589 A don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
|
|
5590 is found.
|
|
5591 I don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.
|
|
5592
|
|
5593 This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
|
|
5594 requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
|
|
5595 possible for the space available. To get the whole message that you
|
|
5596 would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
|
|
5597 Useful values:
|
|
5598 shm= No abbreviation of message.
|
|
5599 shm=a Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
|
|
5600 shm=at Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
|
|
5601
|
|
5602 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
5603 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
5604
|
|
5605 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'*
|
|
5606 'shortname' 'sn' boolean (default off)
|
|
5607 local to buffer
|
|
5608 {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions}
|
|
5609 Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3
|
|
5610 characters. Multiple dots in file names are not allowed. When this
|
|
5611 option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when
|
|
5612 adding an extension (".~" or ".swp"). This option is not available
|
|
5613 for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on. This option is useful
|
|
5614 when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos
|
|
5615 or crossdos. When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this
|
|
5616 option is always on by default.
|
|
5617
|
|
5618 *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
|
|
5619 'showbreak' 'sbr' string (default "")
|
|
5620 global
|
|
5621 {not in Vi}
|
|
5622 {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
|
|
5623 feature}
|
|
5624 String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped. Useful
|
|
5625 values are "> " or "+++ ".
|
|
5626 Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
|
|
5627 comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
|
|
5628 part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
|
|
5629 The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in
|
|
5630 'highlight'.
|
|
5631 Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
|
|
5632 If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
|
|
5633 "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
|
|
5634
|
|
5635 *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
|
|
5636 'showcmd' 'sc' boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
|
|
5637 off)
|
|
5638 global
|
|
5639 {not in Vi}
|
|
5640 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
5641 |+cmdline_info| feature}
|
10
|
5642 Show (partial) command in status line. Set this option off if your
|
7
|
5643 terminal is slow.
|
|
5644 In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
|
|
5645 - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
|
|
5646 - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
|
|
5647 - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: linesxcolumns.
|
|
5648 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
5649 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
5650
|
|
5651 *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
|
|
5652 'showfulltag' 'sft' boolean (default off)
|
|
5653 global
|
|
5654 {not in Vi}
|
|
5655 When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
|
|
5656 tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
|
10
|
5657 pattern (if there is one) as possible matches. Thus, if you have
|
7
|
5658 matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
|
|
5659 required (coding style permitting).
|
|
5660
|
|
5661 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
|
|
5662 'showmatch' 'sm' boolean (default off)
|
|
5663 global
|
|
5664 When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one. The
|
|
5665 jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen. The time to
|
|
5666 show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
|
|
5667 A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
|
|
5668 seen or not). This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
5669 When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
|
|
5670 will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
|
|
5671 See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
|
|
5672 blinking when showing the match.
|
|
5673 The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
|
|
5674 matches for. 'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
|
|
5675 matches.
|
|
5676 Note: For the use of the short form parental guidance is advised.
|
|
5677
|
|
5678 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
|
|
5679 'showmode' 'smd' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
5680 global
|
|
5681 If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
|
|
5682 Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for
|
|
5683 this message.
|
10
|
5684 When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM". But this
|
7
|
5685 doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is
|
|
5686 not set.
|
|
5687 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
5688 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
5689
|
|
5690 *'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
|
|
5691 'sidescroll' 'ss' number (default 0)
|
|
5692 global
|
|
5693 {not in Vi}
|
|
5694 The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally. Used only when
|
|
5695 the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
|
|
5696 When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
|
|
5697 When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0. When using
|
|
5698 a fast terminal use a small number or 1. Not used for "zh" and "zl"
|
|
5699 commands.
|
|
5700
|
|
5701 *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
|
|
5702 'sidescrolloff' 'siso' number (default 0)
|
|
5703 global
|
|
5704 {not in Vi}
|
|
5705 The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
|
534
|
5706 right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a
|
|
5707 value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero
|
|
5708 value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
|
|
5709 horizontally (except at beginning of the line). Setting this option
|
|
5710 to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor
|
|
5711 horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too
|
|
5712 close to the beginning of the line.
|
7
|
5713 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5714
|
|
5715 Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
|
|
5716 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
|
|
5717 onto the "extends" character:
|
|
5718
|
|
5719 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
|
|
5720 :set sidescrolloff=1
|
|
5721
|
|
5722
|
|
5723 *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
|
|
5724 'smartcase' 'scs' boolean (default off)
|
|
5725 global
|
|
5726 {not in Vi}
|
|
5727 Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
|
|
5728 case characters. Only used when the search pattern is typed and
|
|
5729 'ignorecase' option is on. Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
|
10
|
5730 ":g" and ":s". Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc.. After
|
7
|
5731 "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
|
|
5732 recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
|
|
5733 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5734
|
|
5735 *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
|
|
5736 'smartindent' 'si' boolean (default off)
|
|
5737 local to buffer
|
|
5738 {not in Vi}
|
|
5739 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
5740 |+smartindent| feature}
|
|
5741 Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line. Works for C-like
|
|
5742 programs, but can also be used for other languages. 'cindent' does
|
|
5743 something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
|
|
5744 see |C-indenting|. When 'cindent' is on, setting 'si' has no effect.
|
|
5745 'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative.
|
|
5746 Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
|
|
5747 An indent is automatically inserted:
|
|
5748 - After a line ending in '{'.
|
|
5749 - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
|
|
5750 - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).
|
|
5751 When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
|
|
5752 given the same indent as the matching '{'.
|
|
5753 When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
|
|
5754 that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column. The indent
|
10
|
5755 is restored for the next line. If you don't want this, use this
|
7
|
5756 mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
|
|
5757 When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
|
|
5758 right.
|
10
|
5759 NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set. When 'paste'
|
7
|
5760 is set smart indenting is disabled.
|
|
5761
|
|
5762 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
|
|
5763 'smarttab' 'sta' boolean (default off)
|
|
5764 global
|
|
5765 {not in Vi}
|
|
5766 When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
|
|
5767 'shiftwidth'. 'tabstop' is used in other places. A <BS> will delete
|
|
5768 a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the line.
|
|
5769 When off a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop'.
|
|
5770 'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or right
|
|
5771 |shift-left-right|.
|
|
5772 What gets inserted (a Tab or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
|
|
5773 option. Also see |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the
|
11
|
5774 number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
|
7
|
5775 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5776
|
|
5777 *'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
|
|
5778 'softtabstop' 'sts' number (default 0)
|
|
5779 local to buffer
|
|
5780 {not in Vi}
|
|
5781 Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
|
|
5782 operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>. It "feels" like
|
|
5783 <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
|
|
5784 used. This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
|
|
5785 of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'. However,
|
|
5786 commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
|
|
5787 When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
|
|
5788 'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
|
|
5789 See also |ins-expandtab|. When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
|
|
5790 spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
|
|
5791 The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
|
|
5792 set.
|
|
5793 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5794
|
221
|
5795 *'spell'* *'nospell'*
|
|
5796 'spell' boolean (default off)
|
|
5797 local to window
|
|
5798 {not in Vi}
|
|
5799 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
5800 feature}
|
|
5801 When on spell checking will be done. See |spell|.
|
236
|
5802 The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.
|
221
|
5803
|
386
|
5804 *'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'*
|
389
|
5805 'spellcapcheck' 'spc' string (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+")
|
386
|
5806 local to buffer
|
|
5807 {not in Vi}
|
|
5808 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
5809 feature}
|
|
5810 Pattern to locate the end of a sentence. The following word will be
|
|
5811 checked to start with a capital letter. If not then it is highlighted
|
484
|
5812 with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled).
|
386
|
5813 When this check is not wanted make this option empty.
|
|
5814 Only used when 'spell' is set.
|
389
|
5815 Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about
|
|
5816 including spaces and backslashes.
|
480
|
5817 To set this option automatically depending on the language, see
|
|
5818 |set-spc-auto|.
|
386
|
5819
|
314
|
5820 *'spellfile'* *'spf'*
|
|
5821 'spellfile' 'spf' string (default empty)
|
|
5822 local to buffer
|
|
5823 {not in Vi}
|
|
5824 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
5825 feature}
|
|
5826 Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw|
|
401
|
5827 commands. It must end in ".{encoding}.add". You need to include the
|
|
5828 path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.
|
386
|
5829 *E765*
|
|
5830 It may also be a comma separated list of names. A count before the
|
|
5831 |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each. This allows using
|
|
5832 a personal word list file and a project word list file.
|
314
|
5833 When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for
|
|
5834 you: Using the first "spell" directory in 'runtimepath' that is
|
353
|
5835 writable and the first language name that appears in 'spelllang',
|
|
5836 ignoring the region.
|
|
5837 The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
|
|
5838 have to appear in 'spelllang'.
|
|
5839 Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region
|
|
5840 name if you want to. However, it will then only be used when
|
|
5841 'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files
|
|
5842 without region name will be found.
|
336
|
5843 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5844 security reasons.
|
314
|
5845
|
221
|
5846 *'spelllang'* *'spl'*
|
314
|
5847 'spelllang' 'spl' string (default "en")
|
221
|
5848 local to buffer
|
|
5849 {not in Vi}
|
|
5850 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
5851 feature}
|
353
|
5852 A comma separated list of word list names. When the 'spell' option is
|
|
5853 on spellchecking will be done for these languages. Example: >
|
|
5854 set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical
|
|
5855 < This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized. Words
|
|
5856 that are not recognized will be highlighted.
|
|
5857 The word list name must not include a comma or dot. Using a dash is
|
|
5858 recommended to separate the two letter language name from a
|
|
5859 specification. Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.
|
|
5860 A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is
|
|
5861 the two-letter, lower case region name. You can use more than one
|
|
5862 region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
|
|
5863 English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
|
|
5864 Britain.
|
484
|
5865 *E757*
|
419
|
5866 As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is. The
|
|
5867 first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name
|
|
5868 (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).
|
|
5869 This is mainly for testing purposes. You must make sure the correct
|
|
5870 encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.
|
236
|
5871 When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded. Thus it's a good
|
419
|
5872 idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the
|
|
5873 files twice.
|
353
|
5874 How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|.
|
221
|
5875
|
480
|
5876 After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files
|
|
5877 "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'. "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang'
|
|
5878 up to the first comma, dot or underscore. See |set-spc-auto|.
|
|
5879
|
|
5880
|
344
|
5881 *'spellsuggest'* *'sps'*
|
|
5882 'spellsuggest' 'sps' string (default "best")
|
|
5883 global
|
|
5884 {not in Vi}
|
|
5885 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
5886 feature}
|
593
|
5887 Methods used for spelling suggestions. Both for the |z=| command and
|
374
|
5888 the |spellsuggest()| function. This is a comma-separated list of
|
|
5889 items:
|
|
5890
|
|
5891 best Internal method that works best for English. Finds
|
|
5892 changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like
|
|
5893 scoring to improve the ordering.
|
|
5894
|
|
5895 double Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the
|
|
5896 results. The first method is "fast", the other method
|
344
|
5897 computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad
|
374
|
5898 word. That only works when the language specifies
|
|
5899 sound folding. Can be slow and doesn't always give
|
|
5900 better results.
|
|
5901
|
|
5902 fast Internal method that only checks for simple changes:
|
|
5903 character inserts/deletes/swaps. Works well for
|
|
5904 simple typing mistakes.
|
|
5905
|
593
|
5906 {number} The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|.
|
484
|
5907 Not used for |spellsuggest()|. The number of
|
|
5908 suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines'
|
|
5909 minus two.
|
|
5910
|
374
|
5911 file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,
|
|
5912 separated by a slash. The first column contains the
|
|
5913 bad word, the second column the suggested good word.
|
|
5914 Example:
|
|
5915 theribal/terrible ~
|
|
5916 Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the
|
|
5917 top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
|
|
5918 Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
|
|
5919 comments.
|
|
5920 The file is used for all languages.
|
|
5921
|
|
5922 expr:{expr} Evaluate expression {expr}. Use a function to avoid
|
|
5923 trouble with spaces. |v:val| holds the badly spelled
|
|
5924 word. The expression must evaluate to a List of
|
|
5925 Lists, each with a suggestion and a score.
|
|
5926 Example:
|
|
5927 [['the', 33], ['that', 44]]
|
593
|
5928 Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the
|
374
|
5929 internal methods use. A lower score is better.
|
|
5930 This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily
|
|
5931 set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.
|
|
5932 Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the
|
|
5933 'verbose' option to a non-zero value.
|
|
5934
|
|
5935 Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used. The others may
|
|
5936 appear several times in any order. Example: >
|
|
5937 :set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()
|
|
5938 <
|
|
5939 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
5940 security reasons.
|
344
|
5941
|
|
5942
|
7
|
5943 *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
|
|
5944 'splitbelow' 'sb' boolean (default off)
|
|
5945 global
|
|
5946 {not in Vi}
|
|
5947 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
5948 feature}
|
|
5949 When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
|
|
5950 one. |:split|
|
|
5951
|
|
5952 *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
|
|
5953 'splitright' 'spr' boolean (default off)
|
|
5954 global
|
|
5955 {not in Vi}
|
|
5956 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
5957 feature}
|
|
5958 When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
|
|
5959 current one. |:vsplit|
|
|
5960
|
|
5961 *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
|
|
5962 'startofline' 'sol' boolean (default on)
|
|
5963 global
|
|
5964 {not in Vi}
|
|
5965 When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
|
11
|
5966 non-blank of the line. When off the cursor is kept in the same column
|
10
|
5967 (if possible). This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,
|
11
|
5968 CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"
|
7
|
5969 with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing
|
|
5970 commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.). Also for an Ex command that
|
|
5971 only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
|
|
5972 In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
|
|
5973 where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
|
|
5974 NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
5975
|
|
5976 *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542*
|
|
5977 'statusline' 'stl' string (default empty)
|
40
|
5978 global or local to window |global-local|
|
7
|
5979 {not in Vi}
|
|
5980 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
|
|
5981 feature}
|
|
5982 When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.
|
|
5983 Also see |status-line|.
|
|
5984
|
|
5985 The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
|
|
5986 normal text. Each status line item is of the form:
|
|
5987 %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
|
|
5988 All fields except the {item} is optional. A single percent sign can
|
|
5989 be given as "%%". Up to 80 items can be specified.
|
|
5990
|
|
5991 Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
|
|
5992 'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.
|
|
5993
|
|
5994 field meaning ~
|
233
|
5995 - Left justify the item. The default is right justified
|
7
|
5996 when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
|
233
|
5997 0 Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'.
|
7
|
5998 minwid Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.
|
|
5999 Value must be 50 or less.
|
10
|
6000 maxwid Maximum width of the item. Truncation occurs with a '<'
|
7
|
6001 on the left for text items. Numeric items will be
|
|
6002 shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number
|
|
6003 where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
|
|
6004 an exponential notation.
|
|
6005 item A one letter code as described below.
|
|
6006
|
|
6007 Following is a description of the possible statusline items. The
|
|
6008 second character in "item" is the type:
|
|
6009 N for number
|
|
6010 S for string
|
|
6011 F for flags as described below
|
|
6012 - not applicable
|
|
6013
|
|
6014 item meaning ~
|
|
6015 f S Path to the file in the buffer, relative to current directory.
|
|
6016 F S Full path to the file in the buffer.
|
|
6017 t S File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
|
|
6018 m F Modified flag, text is " [+]"; " [-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
|
|
6019 M F Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
|
|
6020 r F Readonly flag, text is " [RO]".
|
|
6021 R F Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
|
|
6022 h F Help buffer flag, text is " [help]".
|
|
6023 H F Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
|
|
6024 w F Preview window flag, text is " [Preview]".
|
|
6025 W F Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
|
|
6026 y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., " [vim]". See 'filetype'.
|
|
6027 Y F Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM". See 'filetype'.
|
|
6028 {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
|
|
6029 k S Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
|
|
6030 being used: "<keymap>"
|
|
6031 n N Buffer number.
|
|
6032 b N Value of byte under cursor.
|
|
6033 B N As above, in hexadecimal.
|
|
6034 o N Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
|
|
6035 Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
|
|
6036 {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature}
|
|
6037 O N As above, in hexadecimal.
|
233
|
6038 N N Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)
|
7
|
6039 l N Line number.
|
|
6040 L N Number of lines in buffer.
|
|
6041 c N Column number.
|
|
6042 v N Virtual column number.
|
10
|
6043 V N Virtual column number as -{num}. Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
|
7
|
6044 p N Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
|
|
6045 P S Percentage through file of displayed window. This is like the
|
|
6046 percentage described for 'ruler'. Always 3 in length.
|
233
|
6047 a S Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max})
|
7
|
6048 Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
|
|
6049 { NF Evaluate expression between '{' and '}' and substitute result.
|
|
6050 ( - Start of item group. Can be used for setting the width and
|
|
6051 alignment of a section. Must be followed by %) somewhere.
|
|
6052 ) - End of item group. No width fields allowed.
|
|
6053 < - Where to truncate line if too long. Default is at the start.
|
|
6054 No width fields allowed.
|
|
6055 = - Separation point between left and right aligned items.
|
|
6056 No width fields allowed.
|
|
6057 * - Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
|
233
|
6058 minwid field, e.g. %1*. Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
|
7
|
6059 The difference between User{N} and StatusLine will be applied
|
|
6060 to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
|
|
6061 The number N must be between 1 and 9. See |hl-User1..9|
|
|
6062
|
|
6063 Display of flags are controlled by the following heuristic:
|
|
6064 If a flag text starts with comma it is assumed that it wants to
|
10
|
6065 separate itself from anything but preceding plaintext. If it starts
|
7
|
6066 with a space it is assumed that it wants to separate itself from
|
|
6067 anything but other flags. That is: A leading comma is removed if the
|
|
6068 preceding character stems from plaintext. A leading space is removed
|
233
|
6069 if the preceding character stems from another active flag. This will
|
7
|
6070 make a nice display when flags are used like in the examples below.
|
|
6071
|
233
|
6072 When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are
|
7
|
6073 not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
|
|
6074 become empty. This will make a group like the following disappear
|
|
6075 completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
|
|
6076 :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
|
|
6077 <
|
|
6078 Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
|
|
6079 line is displayed. The current buffer and current window will be set
|
|
6080 temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
|
233
|
6081 currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context.
|
7
|
6082 The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
|
|
6083 real current buffer. The expression is evaluated in the |sandbox|.
|
|
6084
|
|
6085 If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
|
|
6086 a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
|
|
6087 setting an option without changing its value. Example: >
|
|
6088 :let &ro = &ro
|
|
6089
|
|
6090 < A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
|
|
6091 Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
|
|
6092 described above.
|
|
6093
|
199
|
6094 Watch out for errors in expressions. They may render Vim unusable!
|
7
|
6095 If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
|
|
6096 edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
|
|
6097
|
|
6098 Examples:
|
|
6099 Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
|
|
6100 :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
|
|
6101 < Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
|
|
6102 :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
|
|
6103 < Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
|
|
6104 :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
|
|
6105 :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
|
|
6106 < Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
|
|
6107 :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
|
|
6108 < In the |:autocmd|'s: >
|
|
6109 :let b:gzflag = 1
|
|
6110 < And: >
|
|
6111 :unlet b:gzflag
|
|
6112 < And define this function: >
|
|
6113 :function VarExists(var, val)
|
|
6114 : if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
|
|
6115 :endfunction
|
|
6116 <
|
|
6117 *'suffixes'* *'su'*
|
|
6118 'suffixes' 'su' string (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
|
|
6119 global
|
|
6120 {not in Vi}
|
|
6121 Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
|
|
6122 match a wildcard. See |suffixes|. Commas can be used to separate the
|
10
|
6123 suffixes. Spaces after the comma are ignored. A dot is also seen as
|
|
6124 the start of a suffix. To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
|
7
|
6125 separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
|
|
6126 including spaces and backslashes).
|
|
6127 See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
|
|
6128 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
6129 suffixes from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
6130 uses another default.
|
|
6131
|
|
6132 *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
|
|
6133 'suffixesadd' 'sua' string (default "")
|
|
6134 local to buffer
|
|
6135 {not in Vi}
|
|
6136 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
6137 |+file_in_path| feature}
|
|
6138 Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
|
|
6139 file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands. Example: >
|
|
6140 :set suffixesadd=.java
|
|
6141 <
|
|
6142 *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
|
|
6143 'swapfile' 'swf' boolean (default on)
|
|
6144 local to buffer
|
|
6145 {not in Vi}
|
10
|
6146 Use a swapfile for the buffer. This option can be reset when a
|
7
|
6147 swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer. For example, with
|
|
6148 confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
|
|
6149 Careful: All text will be in memory:
|
|
6150 - Don't use this for big files.
|
|
6151 - Recovery will be impossible!
|
|
6152 A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
|
|
6153 'swapfile' is set.
|
|
6154 When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
|
|
6155 immediately deleted. When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
|
|
6156 non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
|
|
6157 Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
|
|
6158
|
|
6159 This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
|
|
6160 specify special kinds of buffers. See |special-buffers|.
|
|
6161
|
|
6162 *'swapsync'* *'sws'*
|
|
6163 'swapsync' 'sws' string (default "fsync")
|
|
6164 global
|
|
6165 {not in Vi}
|
|
6166 When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after
|
10
|
6167 writing to it. This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.
|
7
|
6168 When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and
|
|
6169 not written to disk. When the system crashes you may lose more work.
|
|
6170 On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,
|
|
6171 so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small. On some
|
|
6172 systems the swap file will not be written at all. For a unix system
|
|
6173 setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
|
|
6174 fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
|
36
|
6175 The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file.
|
7
|
6176
|
|
6177 *'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
|
|
6178 'switchbuf' 'swb' string (default "")
|
|
6179 global
|
|
6180 {not in Vi}
|
|
6181 This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
|
|
6182 Possible values (comma separated list):
|
|
6183 useopen If included, jump to the first open window that
|
|
6184 contains the specified buffer (if there is one).
|
|
6185 Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.
|
|
6186 This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when
|
|
6187 jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.). It is
|
|
6188 also used in all buffer related split commands, for
|
|
6189 example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
|
|
6190 split If included, split the current window before loading
|
233
|
6191 a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
|
7
|
6192 Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
|
|
6193
|
410
|
6194 *'synmaxcol'* *'smc'*
|
|
6195 'synmaxcol' 'smc' number (default 3000)
|
|
6196 local to buffer
|
|
6197 {not in Vi}
|
|
6198 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
6199 feature}
|
419
|
6200 Maximum column in which to search for syntax items. In long lines the
|
|
6201 text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not
|
|
6202 be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.
|
410
|
6203 This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one
|
|
6204 long line.
|
|
6205 Set to zero to remove the limit.
|
|
6206
|
7
|
6207 *'syntax'* *'syn'*
|
|
6208 'syntax' 'syn' string (default empty)
|
|
6209 local to buffer
|
|
6210 {not in Vi}
|
|
6211 {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
|
|
6212 feature}
|
|
6213 When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
|
|
6214 syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
|
|
6215 Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
|
|
6216 b:current_syntax variable does).
|
|
6217 This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
|
410
|
6218 not automatically recognized. Example, in an IDL file: >
|
7
|
6219 /* vim: set syntax=idl : */
|
|
6220 < To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
|
|
6221 :set syntax=OFF
|
|
6222 < To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
|
|
6223 'filetype' option: >
|
|
6224 :set syntax=ON
|
|
6225 < What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
|
|
6226 Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
|
|
6227 This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
|
|
6228 'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
|
36
|
6229 Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
|
7
|
6230
|
|
6231 *'tabstop'* *'ts'*
|
|
6232 'tabstop' 'ts' number (default 8)
|
|
6233 local to buffer
|
|
6234 Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for. Also see
|
|
6235 |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option.
|
|
6236
|
|
6237 Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
|
|
6238 appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).
|
|
6239
|
|
6240 There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
|
|
6241 1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
|
|
6242 (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'. Then Vim
|
|
6243 will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing Tab and BS will
|
|
6244 behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
|
|
6245 2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
|
|
6246 'expandtab'. This way you will always insert spaces. The
|
|
6247 formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
|
|
6248 3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
|
10
|
6249 |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again. Only
|
7
|
6250 works when using Vim to edit the file.
|
|
6251 4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
|
|
6252 'noexpandtab'. This should then work (for initial indents only)
|
|
6253 for any tabstop setting that people use. It might be nice to have
|
|
6254 tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
|
|
6255 though. Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
|
|
6256 changed.
|
|
6257
|
|
6258 *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
|
|
6259 'tagbsearch' 'tbs' boolean (default on)
|
|
6260 global
|
|
6261 {not in Vi}
|
|
6262 When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
|
10
|
6263 use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file. Binary
|
7
|
6264 searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
|
|
6265 will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
|
|
6266 Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
|
|
6267 they are not sorted. Only when this is not the case does the
|
|
6268 'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.
|
|
6269
|
|
6270 When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
|
10
|
6271 files. In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
|
7
|
6272 certain files, or retry all files with a linear search. When
|
|
6273 'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.
|
|
6274
|
|
6275 Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
|
|
6276 at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
|
|
6277 !_TAG_FILE_SORTED 0 /some command/
|
|
6278 < [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
|
|
6279
|
|
6280 When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
|
|
6281 files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
|
|
6282 instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
|
|
6283 Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
|
|
6284 be found in the retry.
|
|
6285
|
22
|
6286 If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
|
7
|
6287 linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case. Use a value
|
|
6288 of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this. A tag file can be
|
|
6289 case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
|
|
6290 the command: "sort -f -o tags tags". For "Exuberant ctags" version
|
|
6291 5.3 or higher the -f or --fold-case-sort switch can be used for this
|
|
6292 as well. Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work.
|
|
6293
|
|
6294 When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
|
|
6295 exists, but faster when no full match exists. Tags in unsorted tags
|
|
6296 files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
|
|
6297 When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
|
|
6298 ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
|
|
6299 must be included in the tags file.
|
|
6300 This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
|
|
6301 command-line completion and ":help").
|
|
6302 {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
|
|
6303
|
|
6304 *'taglength'* *'tl'*
|
|
6305 'taglength' 'tl' number (default 0)
|
|
6306 global
|
|
6307 If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
|
|
6308
|
|
6309 *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
|
|
6310 'tagrelative' 'tr' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
6311 global
|
|
6312 {not in Vi}
|
|
6313 If on and using a tag file in another directory, file names in that
|
|
6314 tag file are relative to the directory where the tag file is.
|
|
6315 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
6316 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
6317
|
|
6318 *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
|
|
6319 'tags' 'tag' string (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with
|
|
6320 |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")
|
|
6321 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
6322 Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas. To
|
|
6323 include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash
|
|
6324 (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes).
|
|
6325 When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
|
|
6326 of the current file. But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
|
|
6327 'cpoptions'. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|. Also see
|
|
6328 |tags-option|.
|
|
6329 "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
|
|
6330 a directory tree. See |file-searching|. {not available when compiled
|
|
6331 without the |+path_extra| feature}
|
515
|
6332 The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names
|
|
6333 actually used.
|
7
|
6334 If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
|
|
6335 files are also supported. They are automatically recognized. The
|
|
6336 default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case
|
|
6337 differences are ignored (MS-Windows). |emacs-tags|
|
|
6338 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
6339 file names from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
6340 uses another default.
|
|
6341 {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}
|
|
6342
|
|
6343 *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
|
|
6344 'tagstack' 'tgst' boolean (default on)
|
|
6345 global
|
|
6346 {not in all versions of Vi}
|
|
6347 When on, the |tagstack| is used normally. When off, a ":tag" or
|
|
6348 ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
|
|
6349 tagstack. A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
|
|
6350 any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
|
|
6351 tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
|
|
6352 Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
|
|
6353 mapping which should not change the tagstack.
|
|
6354
|
|
6355 *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
|
|
6356 'term' string (default is $TERM, if that fails:
|
|
6357 in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
|
|
6358 on Amiga: "amiga"
|
|
6359 on BeOS: "beos-ansi"
|
|
6360 on Mac: "mac-ansi"
|
|
6361 on MiNT: "vt52"
|
|
6362 on MS-DOS: "pcterm"
|
|
6363 on OS/2: "os2ansi"
|
|
6364 on Unix: "ansi"
|
|
6365 on VMS: "ansi"
|
|
6366 on Win 32: "win32")
|
|
6367 global
|
|
6368 Name of the terminal. Used for choosing the terminal control
|
|
6369 characters. Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
|
|
6370 For example: >
|
|
6371 :set term=$TERM
|
|
6372 < See |termcap|.
|
|
6373
|
|
6374 *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'*
|
|
6375 *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
|
|
6376 'termbidi' 'tbidi' boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")
|
|
6377 global
|
|
6378 {not in Vi}
|
|
6379 {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
|
|
6380 feature}
|
|
6381 The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
|
|
6382 by Unicode). The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
|
|
6383 that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
|
|
6384 Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
|
|
6385 'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
|
|
6386 Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
|
|
6387 'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
|
|
6388 This option is reset when the GUI is started.
|
|
6389 For further details see |arabic.txt|.
|
|
6390
|
|
6391 *'termencoding'* *'tenc'*
|
|
6392 'termencoding' 'tenc' string (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with
|
|
6393 Macintosh GUI: "macroman")
|
|
6394 global
|
|
6395 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
|
|
6396 feature}
|
|
6397 {not in Vi}
|
|
6398 Encoding used for the terminal. This specifies what character
|
|
6399 encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand. For
|
|
6400 the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
|
|
6401 display).
|
|
6402 In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
|
|
6403 when it differs from the ANSI codepage.
|
|
6404 *E617*
|
|
6405 Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI. After the GUI has been
|
|
6406 successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
|
|
6407 Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
|
|
6408 message is shown.
|
|
6409 For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,
|
|
6410 because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.
|
|
6411 When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
|
|
6412 This is the normal value.
|
|
6413 Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid. See
|
|
6414 |encoding-table|.
|
|
6415 The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or
|
|
6416 iconv(). When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you
|
|
6417 will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.
|
|
6418 Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and
|
|
6419 want to edit a UTF-8 file: >
|
|
6420 :let &termencoding = &encoding
|
|
6421 :set encoding=utf-8
|
|
6422 < You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
|
|
6423
|
|
6424 *'terse'* *'noterse'*
|
|
6425 'terse' boolean (default off)
|
|
6426 global
|
|
6427 When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message
|
|
6428 for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being
|
|
6429 displayed). When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option. {Vi
|
|
6430 shortens a lot of messages}
|
|
6431
|
|
6432 *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'*
|
|
6433 'textauto' 'ta' boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
|
|
6434 global
|
|
6435 {not in Vi}
|
|
6436 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformats'.
|
|
6437 For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is
|
|
6438 set to the default value for the current system. When 'textauto' is
|
|
6439 reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.
|
|
6440 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
6441 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
6442
|
|
6443 *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'*
|
|
6444 'textmode' 'tx' boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,
|
|
6445 others: default off)
|
|
6446 local to buffer
|
|
6447 {not in Vi}
|
|
6448 This option is obsolete. Use 'fileformat'.
|
|
6449 For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is
|
|
6450 set to "dos". When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to
|
|
6451 "unix".
|
|
6452
|
|
6453 *'textwidth'* *'tw'*
|
|
6454 'textwidth' 'tw' number (default 0)
|
|
6455 local to buffer
|
|
6456 {not in Vi}
|
|
6457 Maximum width of text that is being inserted. A longer line will be
|
|
6458 broken after white space to get this width. A zero value disables
|
10
|
6459 this. 'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set. When
|
|
6460 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used. See also
|
7
|
6461 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
|
|
6462 NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
6463
|
|
6464 *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
|
|
6465 'thesaurus' 'tsr' string (default "")
|
|
6466 global or local to buffer |global-local|
|
|
6467 {not in Vi}
|
|
6468 List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
|
10
|
6469 for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|. Each line in
|
7
|
6470 the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
|
|
6471 non-keyword characters (white space is preferred). Maximum line
|
|
6472 length is 510 bytes.
|
|
6473 To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
|
|
6474 http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
|
10
|
6475 To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash. Spaces
|
7
|
6476 after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
|
|
6477 name. See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
|
|
6478 The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
6479 directories from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
6480 uses another default.
|
|
6481 Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
|
|
6482
|
|
6483 *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
|
|
6484 'tildeop' 'top' boolean (default off)
|
|
6485 global
|
|
6486 {not in Vi}
|
|
6487 When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
|
|
6488 NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
6489
|
|
6490 *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
|
|
6491 'timeout' 'to' boolean (default on)
|
|
6492 global
|
|
6493 *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
|
|
6494 'ttimeout' boolean (default off)
|
|
6495 global
|
|
6496 {not in Vi}
|
|
6497 These two options together determine the behavior when part of a
|
|
6498 mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:
|
|
6499
|
|
6500 'timeout' 'ttimeout' action ~
|
|
6501 off off do not time out
|
|
6502 on on or off time out on :mappings and key codes
|
|
6503 off on time out on key codes
|
|
6504
|
|
6505 If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete
|
|
6506 mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there
|
|
6507 is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters. For
|
|
6508 example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next
|
|
6509 character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.
|
|
6510 When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for
|
|
6511 the next character to arrive. After that the already received
|
|
6512 characters are interpreted as single characters. The waiting time can
|
|
6513 be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.
|
|
6514 On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause
|
|
6515 malfunctioning cursor keys. If both options are off, Vim waits
|
|
6516 forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start
|
|
6517 with <Esc>. You will have to type <Esc> twice. If you do not have
|
|
6518 problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key
|
|
6519 sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and
|
|
6520 reset the 'timeout' option.
|
|
6521
|
|
6522 NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
|
|
6523
|
|
6524 *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
|
|
6525 'timeoutlen' 'tm' number (default 1000)
|
|
6526 global
|
|
6527 {not in all versions of Vi}
|
|
6528 *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
|
|
6529 'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm' number (default -1)
|
|
6530 global
|
|
6531 {not in Vi}
|
|
6532 The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key
|
|
6533 sequence to complete. Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G
|
|
6534 when part of a command has been typed.
|
|
6535 Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1. When a
|
|
6536 different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to
|
|
6537 a non-negative number.
|
|
6538
|
|
6539 ttimeoutlen mapping delay key code delay ~
|
|
6540 < 0 'timeoutlen' 'timeoutlen'
|
|
6541 >= 0 'timeoutlen' 'ttimeoutlen'
|
|
6542
|
|
6543 The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options
|
|
6544 tell so. A useful setting would be >
|
|
6545 :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100
|
|
6546 < (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after
|
|
6547 a tenth of a second).
|
|
6548
|
|
6549 *'title'* *'notitle'*
|
|
6550 'title' boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
|
|
6551 global
|
|
6552 {not in Vi}
|
|
6553 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
6554 feature}
|
|
6555 When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
|
|
6556 'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
|
|
6557 filename [+=-] (path) - VIM
|
|
6558 Where:
|
|
6559 filename the name of the file being edited
|
|
6560 - indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
|
|
6561 + indicates the file was modified
|
|
6562 = indicates the file is read-only
|
|
6563 =+ indicates the file is read-only and modified
|
|
6564 (path) is the path of the file being edited
|
|
6565 - VIM the server name |v:servername| or "VIM"
|
|
6566 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles
|
|
6567 (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and
|
|
6568 terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and
|
|
6569 iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).
|
|
6570 *X11*
|
|
6571 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
|
|
6572 be restored if possible. The output of ":version" will include "+X11"
|
|
6573 when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11". This also
|
|
6574 works for the icon name |'icon'|.
|
|
6575 But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title
|
|
6576 will not work (except in the GUI).
|
|
6577 If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.
|
|
6578 You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.
|
|
6579 When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:
|
|
6580 rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &
|
|
6581 then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the
|
|
6582 title of the window should change back to what it should be after
|
|
6583 exiting Vim.
|
|
6584
|
|
6585 *'titlelen'*
|
|
6586 'titlelen' number (default 85)
|
|
6587 global
|
|
6588 {not in Vi}
|
|
6589 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
6590 feature}
|
|
6591 Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
|
10
|
6592 title. When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
|
|
6593 shown. A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
|
7
|
6594 Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window. But
|
|
6595 it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
|
|
6596 available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
|
|
6597 bar. When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used. Otherwise,
|
|
6598 values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
|
|
6599 'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
|
|
6600
|
|
6601 *'titleold'*
|
|
6602 'titleold' string (default "Thanks for flying Vim")
|
|
6603 global
|
|
6604 {not in Vi}
|
|
6605 {only available when compiled with the |+title|
|
|
6606 feature}
|
|
6607 This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
|
|
6608 original title cannot be restored. Only happens if 'title' is on or
|
|
6609 'titlestring' is not empty.
|
36
|
6610 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
6611 security reasons.
|
7
|
6612 *'titlestring'*
|
|
6613 'titlestring' string (default "")
|
|
6614 global
|
|
6615 {not in Vi}
|
|
6616 {not available when compiled without the |+title|
|
|
6617 feature}
|
|
6618 When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
|
|
6619 window. This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
|
|
6620 Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently
|
|
6621 Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a
|
|
6622 non-empty 't_ts' option).
|
|
6623 When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
|
|
6624 be restored if possible |X11|.
|
|
6625 When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
|
|
6626 expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
|
|
6627 Example: >
|
|
6628 :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")
|
|
6629 :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
|
|
6630 < The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
|
|
6631 of the available space.
|
|
6632 Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
|
|
6633 :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
|
|
6634 < Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
|
10
|
6635 without the file name. The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
|
7
|
6636 separating space only when needed.
|
|
6637 NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
|
|
6638 to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
|
|
6639 {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
|
|
6640
|
|
6641 *'toolbar'* *'tb'*
|
|
6642 'toolbar' 'tb' string (default "icons,tooltips")
|
|
6643 global
|
|
6644 {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and
|
|
6645 |+GUI_Photon|}
|
10
|
6646 The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings. The
|
7
|
6647 possible values are:
|
|
6648 icons Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.
|
|
6649 text Toolbar buttons shown with text.
|
|
6650 horiz Icon and text of a toolbar button are
|
10
|
6651 horizontally arranged. {only in GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
7
|
6652 tooltips Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.
|
|
6653 Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse
|
|
6654 cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.
|
|
6655
|
|
6656 If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the
|
|
6657 following: >
|
|
6658 :set tb=icons,text
|
|
6659 < Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time. They
|
|
6660 will show icons if both are requested.
|
|
6661
|
|
6662 If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if
|
|
6663 'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored. If you want to disable
|
|
6664 the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option. For example: >
|
|
6665 :set guioptions-=T
|
|
6666 < Also see |gui-toolbar|.
|
|
6667
|
|
6668 *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'*
|
|
6669 'toolbariconsize' 'tbis' string (default "small")
|
|
6670 global
|
|
6671 {not in Vi}
|
|
6672 {only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
|
|
6673 Controls the size of toolbar icons. The possible values are:
|
|
6674 tiny Use tiny toolbar icons.
|
|
6675 small Use small toolbar icons (default).
|
|
6676 medium Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
|
|
6677 large Use large toolbar icons.
|
|
6678 The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
|
|
6679 the current theme. Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
|
|
6680 small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
|
|
6681
|
|
6682 If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
|
|
6683 by user preferences or the current theme is used.
|
|
6684
|
|
6685 *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'*
|
|
6686 'ttybuiltin' 'tbi' boolean (default on)
|
|
6687 global
|
|
6688 {not in Vi}
|
|
6689 When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.
|
|
6690 When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.
|
|
6691 When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for
|
|
6692 the change to take effect, for example: >
|
|
6693 :set notbi term=$TERM
|
|
6694 < See also |termcap|.
|
|
6695 Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin
|
|
6696 termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty
|
|
6697 xterm entries...).
|
|
6698
|
|
6699 *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'*
|
|
6700 'ttyfast' 'tf' boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,
|
|
6701 sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or
|
|
6702 iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in
|
|
6703 a DOS console)
|
|
6704 global
|
|
6705 {not in Vi}
|
|
6706 Indicates a fast terminal connection. More characters will be sent to
|
|
6707 the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line
|
|
6708 commands. Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple
|
|
6709 windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.
|
|
6710 Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen
|
|
6711 line for lines that wrap. This helps when using copy/paste with the
|
|
6712 mouse in an xterm and other terminals.
|
|
6713
|
|
6714 *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'*
|
|
6715 'ttymouse' 'ttym' string (default depends on 'term')
|
|
6716 global
|
|
6717 {not in Vi}
|
|
6718 {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not
|
|
6719 available when compiled without |+mouse|}
|
|
6720 Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.
|
|
6721 Currently these three strings are valid:
|
|
6722 *xterm-mouse*
|
|
6723 xterm xterm-like mouse handling. The mouse generates
|
|
6724 "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:
|
|
6725 "s" = button state
|
|
6726 "c" = column plus 33
|
|
6727 "r" = row plus 33
|
189
|
6728 This only works up to 223 columns! See "dec" for a
|
|
6729 solution.
|
7
|
6730 xterm2 Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
|
|
6731 mouse position while the mouse is dragged. This works
|
|
6732 much faster and more precise. Your xterm must at
|
180
|
6733 least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to
|
7
|
6734 work. See below for how Vim detects this
|
|
6735 automatically.
|
|
6736 *netterm-mouse*
|
|
6737 netterm NetTerm mouse handling. The mouse generates
|
|
6738 "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers
|
|
6739 for the row and column.
|
|
6740 *dec-mouse*
|
|
6741 dec DEC terminal mouse handling. The mouse generates a
|
|
6742 rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".
|
189
|
6743 This is also available for an Xterm, if it was
|
|
6744 configured with "--enable-dec-locator".
|
7
|
6745 *jsbterm-mouse*
|
|
6746 jsbterm JSB term mouse handling.
|
|
6747 *pterm-mouse*
|
|
6748 pterm QNX pterm mouse handling.
|
|
6749
|
|
6750 The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
|
|
6751 |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
|
|
6752 Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized. NetTerm mouse codes are always
|
|
6753 recognized, if enabled at compile time. DEC terminal mouse codes
|
|
6754 are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
|
|
6755 "xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
|
|
6756 This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
|
|
6757 set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
|
|
6758 or "xterm2" already. The main use of this option is to set it to
|
|
6759 "xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
|
|
6760 handle xterm mouse codes.
|
|
6761 The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
|
|
6762 95 of higher. This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
|
|
6763 feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
|
|
6764 xterm version number. Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
|
|
6765 If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
|
|
6766 t_RV to an empty string: >
|
|
6767 :set t_RV=
|
|
6768 <
|
|
6769 *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*
|
|
6770 'ttyscroll' 'tsl' number (default 999)
|
|
6771 global
|
|
6772 Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen. If there are more lines
|
|
6773 to scroll the window is redrawn. For terminals where scrolling is
|
|
6774 very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,
|
|
6775 e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.
|
|
6776
|
|
6777 *'ttytype'* *'tty'*
|
|
6778 'ttytype' 'tty' string (default from $TERM)
|
|
6779 global
|
|
6780 Alias for 'term', see above.
|
|
6781
|
|
6782 *'undolevels'* *'ul'*
|
|
6783 'undolevels' 'ul' number (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
|
|
6784 Win32 and OS/2)
|
|
6785 global
|
|
6786 {not in Vi}
|
|
6787 Maximum number of changes that can be undone. Since undo information
|
|
6788 is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used
|
|
6789 (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).
|
|
6790 Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
|
|
6791 itself: >
|
|
6792 set ul=0
|
|
6793 < But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
|
|
6794 'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
|
|
6795 Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
|
|
6796 set ul=-1
|
|
6797 < This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
|
|
6798 Also see |undo-two-ways|.
|
|
6799
|
|
6800 *'updatecount'* *'uc'*
|
|
6801 'updatecount' 'uc' number (default: 200)
|
|
6802 global
|
|
6803 {not in Vi}
|
|
6804 After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
|
|
6805 disk. When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
|
|
6806 recovery |crash-recovery|). 'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
|
|
6807 Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|. When editing in readonly
|
|
6808 mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
|
|
6809 The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
|
|
6810 When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
|
|
6811 created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set. When 'updatecount'
|
|
6812 is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
|
|
6813 Also see |'swapsync'|.
|
|
6814 This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
|
|
6815 or "nowrite".
|
|
6816
|
|
6817 *'updatetime'* *'ut'*
|
|
6818 'updatetime' 'ut' number (default 4000)
|
|
6819 global
|
|
6820 {not in Vi}
|
|
6821 If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
|
|
6822 written to disk (see |crash-recovery|). Also used for the
|
|
6823 |CursorHold| autocommand event.
|
|
6824
|
|
6825 *'verbose'* *'vbs'*
|
|
6826 'verbose' 'vbs' number (default 0)
|
|
6827 global
|
|
6828 {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean
|
|
6829 verbose option}
|
|
6830 When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.
|
|
6831 Currently, these messages are given:
|
|
6832 >= 1 When the viminfo file is read or written.
|
|
6833 >= 2 When a file is ":source"'ed.
|
|
6834 >= 5 Every searched tags file.
|
|
6835 >= 8 Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
|
|
6836 >= 9 Every executed autocommand.
|
|
6837 >= 12 Every executed function.
|
|
6838 >= 13 When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
|
|
6839 >= 14 Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
|
|
6840 >= 15 Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).
|
|
6841
|
|
6842 This option can also be set with the "-V" argument. See |-V|.
|
|
6843 This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.
|
|
6844
|
293
|
6845 When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not
|
|
6846 displayed.
|
|
6847
|
|
6848 *'verbosefile'* *'vfile'*
|
|
6849 'verbosefile' 'vfile' string (default empty)
|
|
6850 global
|
|
6851 {not in Vi}
|
|
6852 When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
|
|
6853 When the file exists messages are appended.
|
|
6854 Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
|
|
6855 empty.
|
|
6856 Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
|
|
6857 The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
|
|
6858 displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.
|
|
6859
|
7
|
6860 *'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
|
|
6861 'viewdir' 'vdir' string (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
|
|
6862 "$VIM/vimfiles/view",
|
|
6863 for Unix: "~/.vim/view",
|
|
6864 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"
|
|
6865 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"
|
|
6866 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
|
|
6867 global
|
|
6868 {not in Vi}
|
|
6869 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
|
6870 feature}
|
|
6871 Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
|
|
6872 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
6873 security reasons.
|
|
6874
|
|
6875 *'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
|
|
6876 'viewoptions' 'vop' string (default: "folds,options,cursor")
|
|
6877 global
|
|
6878 {not in Vi}
|
|
6879 {not available when compiled without the +mksession
|
|
6880 feature}
|
|
6881 Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command. It is a comma separated
|
10
|
6882 list of words. Each word enables saving and restoring something:
|
7
|
6883 word save and restore ~
|
|
6884 cursor cursor position in file and in window
|
|
6885 folds manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
|
|
6886 fold options
|
|
6887 options options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
|
|
6888 global values for local options)
|
|
6889 slash backslashes in file names replaced with forward
|
|
6890 slashes
|
|
6891 unix with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
|
|
6892 on Windows or DOS
|
|
6893
|
|
6894 "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
|
|
6895 with Unix. The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
|
|
6896 but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
|
|
6897
|
|
6898 *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
|
|
6899 'viminfo' 'vi' string (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,
|
|
6900 Windows and OS/2: '20,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:,
|
|
6901 for Amiga: '20,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:
|
|
6902 for others: '20,<50,s10,h)
|
|
6903 global
|
|
6904 {not in Vi}
|
|
6905 {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
|
|
6906 feature}
|
|
6907 When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
|
10
|
6908 when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|). The string should be a comma
|
7
|
6909 separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
|
|
6910 identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
|
|
6911 which specifies the value of that parameter. If a particular
|
|
6912 character is left out, then the default value is used for that
|
|
6913 parameter. The following is a list of the identifying characters and
|
|
6914 the effect of their value.
|
|
6915 CHAR VALUE ~
|
|
6916 ! When included, save and restore global variables that start
|
|
6917 with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
|
|
6918 letter. Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
|
75
|
6919 and "_K_L_M" are not. Only String and Number types are
|
|
6920 stored.
|
7
|
6921 " Maximum number of lines saved for each register. Old name of
|
|
6922 the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
|
|
6923 backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
|
|
6924 start of a comment!
|
|
6925 % When included, save and restore the buffer list. If Vim is
|
|
6926 started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
|
|
6927 restored. If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
|
10
|
6928 buffer list is restored from the viminfo file. Buffers
|
7
|
6929 without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
|
|
6930 to the viminfo file.
|
23
|
6931 When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
|
|
6932 number of buffers that are stored. Without a number all
|
|
6933 buffers are stored.
|
7
|
6934 ' Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
|
|
6935 are remembered. This parameter must always be included when
|
|
6936 'viminfo' is non-empty.
|
|
6937 Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
|
|
6938 |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
|
|
6939 / Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
|
10
|
6940 saved. If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
|
7
|
6941 patterns are also saved. When not included, the value of
|
|
6942 'history' is used.
|
|
6943 : Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
|
10
|
6944 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
|
7
|
6945 < Maximum number of lines saved for each register. If zero then
|
|
6946 registers are not saved. When not included, all lines are
|
|
6947 saved. '"' is the old name for this item.
|
|
6948 Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
|
|
6949 @ Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
|
10
|
6950 saved. When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
|
7
|
6951 c When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
|
|
6952 'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
|
233
|
6953 'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|.
|
7
|
6954 f Whether file marks need to be stored. If zero, file marks ('0
|
|
6955 to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored. When not present or when
|
10
|
6956 non-zero, they are all stored. '0 is used for the current
|
7
|
6957 cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
|
|
6958 h Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
|
|
6959 file. When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
|
|
6960 has been used since the last search command.
|
|
6961 n Name of the viminfo file. The name must immediately follow
|
|
6962 the 'n'. Must be the last one! If the "-i" argument was
|
|
6963 given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
|
|
6964 given here with 'viminfo'. Environment variables are expanded
|
|
6965 when opening the file, not when setting the option.
|
|
6966 r Removable media. The argument is a string (up to the next
|
|
6967 ','). This parameter can be given several times. Each
|
|
6968 specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
|
|
6969 stored. This is to avoid removable media. For MS-DOS you
|
|
6970 could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:". You can
|
|
6971 also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp". Case is
|
|
6972 ignored. Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
|
|
6973 characters.
|
|
6974 s Maximum size of an item in Kbyte. If zero then registers are
|
|
6975 not saved. Currently only applies to registers. The default
|
|
6976 "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
|
|
6977 Also see the '<' item above: line count limit.
|
|
6978
|
|
6979 Example: >
|
|
6980 :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo
|
|
6981 <
|
|
6982 '50 Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
|
|
6983 edited.
|
|
6984 <1000 Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
|
|
6985 remembered.
|
|
6986 s100 Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped.
|
|
6987 :0 Command-line history will not be saved.
|
|
6988 n~/vim/viminfo The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".
|
|
6989 no / Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
|
|
6990 that is, save all of the search history, and also the
|
|
6991 previous search and substitute patterns.
|
|
6992 no % The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
|
|
6993 no h 'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.
|
|
6994
|
|
6995 When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to
|
|
6996 load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.
|
|
6997
|
|
6998 This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
|
|
6999 security reasons.
|
|
7000
|
|
7001 *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
|
|
7002 'virtualedit' 've' string (default "")
|
|
7003 global
|
|
7004 {not in Vi}
|
|
7005 {not available when compiled without the
|
|
7006 |+virtualedit| feature}
|
|
7007 A comma separated list of these words:
|
|
7008 block Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
|
|
7009 insert Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
|
|
7010 all Allow virtual editing in all modes.
|
|
7011 Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
|
|
7012 no actual character. This can be halfway into a Tab or beyond the end
|
|
7013 of the line. Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
|
|
7014 editing a table.
|
|
7015
|
|
7016 *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
|
|
7017 'visualbell' 'vb' boolean (default off)
|
|
7018 global
|
|
7019 {not in Vi}
|
|
7020 Use visual bell instead of beeping. The terminal code to display the
|
|
7021 visual bell is given with 't_vb'. When no beep or flash is wanted,
|
|
7022 use ":set vb t_vb=".
|
|
7023 Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value. You
|
|
7024 might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
|
|
7025 In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
|
|
7026 for 20 msec. If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
|
|
7027 where 40 is the time in msec.
|
|
7028 Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
|
|
7029 Also see 'errorbells'.
|
|
7030
|
|
7031 *'warn'* *'nowarn'*
|
|
7032 'warn' boolean (default on)
|
|
7033 global
|
|
7034 Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
|
|
7035 has been changed.
|
|
7036
|
|
7037 *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'*
|
|
7038 'weirdinvert' 'wiv' boolean (default off)
|
|
7039 global
|
|
7040 {not in Vi}
|
|
7041 This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' termcap option.
|
|
7042 It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.
|
|
7043 Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and
|
|
7044 vice versa. Has no effect when the GUI is running.
|
|
7045
|
|
7046 *'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
|
|
7047 'whichwrap' 'ww' string (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")
|
|
7048 global
|
|
7049 {not in Vi}
|
|
7050 Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
|
|
7051 previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
|
|
7052 the line. Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
|
|
7053 char key mode ~
|
|
7054 b <BS> Normal and Visual
|
|
7055 s <Space> Normal and Visual
|
|
7056 h "h" Normal and Visual
|
|
7057 l "l" Normal and Visual
|
|
7058 < <Left> Normal and Visual
|
|
7059 > <Right> Normal and Visual
|
|
7060 ~ "~" Normal
|
|
7061 [ <Left> Insert and Replace
|
|
7062 ] <Right> Insert and Replace
|
|
7063 For example: >
|
|
7064 :set ww=<,>,[,]
|
|
7065 < allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
|
|
7066 When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
|
|
7067 operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character. This makes "3h"
|
|
7068 different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line. This
|
|
7069 is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
|
|
7070 "dh". If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
|
|
7071 ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
|
|
7072 cursor.
|
|
7073 When 'l' is included, you get a side effect: "yl" on an empty line
|
|
7074 will include the <EOL>, so that "p" will insert a new line.
|
|
7075 NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
7076 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
7077
|
|
7078 *'wildchar'* *'wc'*
|
|
7079 'wildchar' 'wc' number (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)
|
|
7080 global
|
|
7081 {not in Vi}
|
|
7082 Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
|
|
7083 command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
|
|
7084 The character is not recognized when used inside a macro. See
|
|
7085 'wildcharm' for that.
|
|
7086 Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
|
|
7087 :set wc=<Esc>
|
|
7088 < NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
7089 set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
|
|
7090
|
|
7091 *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
|
|
7092 'wildcharm' 'wcm' number (default: none (0))
|
|
7093 global
|
|
7094 {not in Vi}
|
|
7095 'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
|
233
|
7096 recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line
|
|
7097 keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally
|
7
|
7098 you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
|
|
7099 automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
|
|
7100 :set wcm=<C-Z>
|
|
7101 :cmap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
|
|
7102 < Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
|
|
7103
|
|
7104 *'wildignore'* *'wig'*
|
|
7105 'wildignore' 'wig' string (default "")
|
|
7106 global
|
|
7107 {not in Vi}
|
|
7108 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
|
|
7109 feature}
|
|
7110 A list of file patterns. A file that matches with one of these
|
|
7111 patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names.
|
|
7112 The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
|
|
7113 Also see 'suffixes'.
|
|
7114 Example: >
|
|
7115 :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
|
|
7116 < The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
|
|
7117 a pattern from the list. This avoids problems when a future version
|
|
7118 uses another default.
|
|
7119
|
|
7120 *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
|
|
7121 'wildmenu' 'wmnu' boolean (default off)
|
|
7122 global
|
|
7123 {not in Vi}
|
|
7124 {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
|
|
7125 feature}
|
|
7126 When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
|
|
7127 mode. On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
|
|
7128 the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the
|
|
7129 first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is
|
|
7130 one). Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
|
|
7131 CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
|
|
7132 When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
|
|
7133 specified. "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
|
|
7134 If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
|
|
7135 the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left. The status line scrolls
|
|
7136 as needed.
|
|
7137 The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used
|
|
7138 for selecting a completion.
|
|
7139 While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special
|
|
7140 meanings:
|
|
7141
|
|
7142 <Left> <Right> - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
|
|
7143 <Down> - in filename/menu name completion: move into a
|
|
7144 subdirectory or submenu.
|
|
7145 <CR> - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
|
|
7146 dot: move into a submenu.
|
|
7147 <Up> - in filename/menu name completion: move up into
|
|
7148 parent directory or parent menu.
|
|
7149
|
|
7150 This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|.
|
|
7151
|
|
7152 If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead
|
|
7153 of selecting a different match, use this: >
|
|
7154 :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
|
|
7155 :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
|
|
7156 <
|
|
7157 The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match
|
|
7158 |hl-WildMenu|.
|
|
7159
|
|
7160 *'wildmode'* *'wim'*
|
|
7161 'wildmode' 'wim' string (Vim default: "full")
|
|
7162 global
|
|
7163 {not in Vi}
|
|
7164 Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
|
10
|
7165 'wildchar'. It is a comma separated list of up to four parts. Each
|
7
|
7166 part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar. The
|
|
7167 first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
|
|
7168 The second part for the second use, etc.
|
|
7169 These are the possible values for each part:
|
|
7170 "" Complete only the first match.
|
|
7171 "full" Complete the next full match. After the last match,
|
|
7172 the original string is used and then the first match
|
|
7173 again.
|
|
7174 "longest" Complete till longest common string. If this doesn't
|
|
7175 result in a longer string, use the next part.
|
|
7176 "longest:full" Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
|
|
7177 enabled.
|
|
7178 "list" When more than one match, list all matches.
|
|
7179 "list:full" When more than one match, list all matches and
|
|
7180 complete first match.
|
|
7181 "list:longest" When more than one match, list all matches and
|
|
7182 complete till longest common string.
|
|
7183 When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.
|
|
7184
|
|
7185 Examples: >
|
|
7186 :set wildmode=full
|
233
|
7187 < Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) >
|
7
|
7188 :set wildmode=longest,full
|
|
7189 < Complete longest common string, then each full match >
|
|
7190 :set wildmode=list:full
|
|
7191 < List all matches and complete each full match >
|
|
7192 :set wildmode=list,full
|
|
7193 < List all matches without completing, then each full match >
|
|
7194 :set wildmode=longest,list
|
|
7195 < Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
|
|
7196
|
40
|
7197 *'wildoptions'* *'wop'*
|
|
7198 'wildoptions' 'wop' string (default "")
|
|
7199 global
|
|
7200 {not in Vi}
|
|
7201 {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
|
|
7202 feature}
|
|
7203 A list of words that change how command line completion is done.
|
|
7204 Currently only one word is allowed:
|
|
7205 tagfile When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
|
|
7206 tag and the file of the tag is listed. Only one match
|
|
7207 is displayed per line. Often used tag kinds are:
|
|
7208 d #define
|
|
7209 f function
|
|
7210 Also see |cmdline-completion|.
|
|
7211
|
7
|
7212 *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
|
|
7213 'winaltkeys' 'wak' string (default "menu")
|
|
7214 global
|
|
7215 {not in Vi}
|
|
7216 {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}
|
|
7217 Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
|
|
7218 key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
|
|
7219 menu. This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
|
|
7220 entering special characters. This option tells what to do:
|
|
7221 no Don't use ALT keys for menus. ALT key combinations can be
|
|
7222 mapped, but there is no automatic handling. This can then be
|
|
7223 done with the |:simalt| command.
|
|
7224 yes ALT key handling is done by the windowing system. ALT key
|
|
7225 combinations cannot be mapped.
|
|
7226 menu Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
|
10
|
7227 shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system. Other
|
7
|
7228 keys can be mapped.
|
|
7229 If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
|
|
7230 key is never used for the menu.
|
36
|
7231 This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will
|
|
7232 select the menu, unless it has been mapped.
|
7
|
7233
|
164
|
7234 *'window'* *'wi'*
|
|
7235 'window' 'wi' number (default screen height - 1)
|
|
7236 global
|
|
7237 Window height. Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window,
|
|
7238 use 'lines' for that.
|
179
|
7239 Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the
|
|
7240 value is smaller than 'lines' minus one. The screen will scroll
|
|
7241 'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.
|
164
|
7242 When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll
|
|
7243 in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.
|
|
7244 When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than
|
|
7245 or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.
|
|
7246 {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines}
|
|
7247
|
7
|
7248 *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
|
|
7249 'winheight' 'wh' number (default 1)
|
|
7250 global
|
|
7251 {not in Vi}
|
|
7252 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
7253 feature}
|
|
7254 Minimal number of lines for the current window. This is not a hard
|
10
|
7255 minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room. If the
|
7
|
7256 current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the
|
|
7257 height of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
|
|
7258 always fill the screen (although this has the drawback that ":all"
|
|
7259 will create only two windows). Set it to a small number for normal
|
|
7260 editing.
|
|
7261 Minimum value is 1.
|
|
7262 The height is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
|
|
7263 height of the current window.
|
|
7264 'winheight' applies to the current window. Use 'winminheight' to set
|
|
7265 the minimal height for other windows.
|
|
7266
|
|
7267 *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'*
|
|
7268 'winfixheight' 'wfh' boolean (default off)
|
|
7269 local to window
|
|
7270 {not in Vi}
|
|
7271 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
7272 feature}
|
|
7273 Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
|
|
7274 'equalalways' is set. Set by default for the |preview-window| and
|
|
7275 |quickfix-window|.
|
|
7276 The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
|
|
7277
|
|
7278 *'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
|
|
7279 'winminheight' 'wmh' number (default 1)
|
|
7280 global
|
|
7281 {not in Vi}
|
|
7282 {not available when compiled without the +windows
|
|
7283 feature}
|
|
7284 The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
|
|
7285 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
|
|
7286 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
|
|
7287 status bar) if necessary. They will return to at least one line when
|
|
7288 they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
|
|
7289 Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
|
|
7290 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
|
|
7291 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
|
|
7292 windows. A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
|
|
7293
|
|
7294 *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
|
|
7295 'winminwidth' 'wmw' number (default 1)
|
|
7296 global
|
|
7297 {not in Vi}
|
|
7298 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
7299 feature}
|
|
7300 The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
|
|
7301 This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
|
|
7302 When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
|
|
7303 a vertical separator) if necessary. They will return to at least one
|
|
7304 line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
|
|
7305 to go.)
|
|
7306 Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
|
|
7307 This option is only checked when making a window smaller. Don't use a
|
|
7308 large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
|
|
7309 windows. A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
|
|
7310
|
|
7311 *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
|
|
7312 'winwidth' 'wiw' number (default 20)
|
|
7313 global
|
|
7314 {not in Vi}
|
|
7315 {not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
|
|
7316 feature}
|
|
7317 Minimal number of columns for the current window. This is not a hard
|
|
7318 minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room. If
|
|
7319 the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
|
|
7320 the width of other windows. Set it to 999 to make the current window
|
|
7321 always fill the screen. Set it to a small number for normal editing.
|
|
7322 The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
|
|
7323 width of the current window.
|
|
7324 'winwidth' applies to the current window. Use 'winminwidth' to set
|
|
7325 the minimal width for other windows.
|
|
7326
|
|
7327 *'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
|
|
7328 'wrap' boolean (default on)
|
|
7329 local to window
|
|
7330 {not in Vi}
|
|
7331 This option changes how text is displayed. It doesn't change the text
|
|
7332 in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
|
|
7333 When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
|
10
|
7334 displaying continues on the next line. When off lines will not wrap
|
|
7335 and only part of long lines will be displayed. When the cursor is
|
7
|
7336 moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
|
|
7337 horizontally.
|
|
7338 The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary. See
|
|
7339 'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
|
|
7340 To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
|
|
7341 :set sidescroll=5
|
|
7342 :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
|
|
7343 < See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
|
|
7344
|
|
7345 *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
|
|
7346 'wrapmargin' 'wm' number (default 0)
|
|
7347 local to buffer
|
|
7348 Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
|
|
7349 starts. When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
|
|
7350 and inserting continues on the next line.
|
|
7351 Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
|
|
7352 the text width to be further reduced. This is Vi compatible.
|
|
7353 When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
|
|
7354 See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|. {Vi: works differently
|
|
7355 and less usefully}
|
|
7356
|
|
7357 *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'*
|
|
7358 'wrapscan' 'ws' boolean (default on) *E384* *E385*
|
|
7359 global
|
500
|
7360 Searches wrap around the end of the file. Also applies to |]s| and
|
|
7361 |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes.
|
7
|
7362
|
|
7363 *'write'* *'nowrite'*
|
|
7364 'write' boolean (default on)
|
|
7365 global
|
|
7366 {not in Vi}
|
|
7367 Allows writing files. When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
|
|
7368 Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
|
10
|
7369 still allowed. Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
|
7
|
7370 argument. Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
|
|
7371 writing a temporary file.
|
|
7372
|
|
7373 *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
|
|
7374 'writeany' 'wa' boolean (default off)
|
|
7375 global
|
|
7376 Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
|
|
7377
|
|
7378 *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
|
|
7379 'writebackup' 'wb' boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off
|
|
7380 otherwise)
|
|
7381 global
|
|
7382 {not in Vi}
|
|
7383 Make a backup before overwriting a file. The backup is removed after
|
|
7384 the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
|
|
7385 also on. Reset this option if your file system is almost full. See
|
|
7386 |backup-table| for another explanation.
|
|
7387 When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
|
|
7388 NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
|
|
7389 set.
|
|
7390
|
|
7391 *'writedelay'* *'wd'*
|
|
7392 'writedelay' 'wd' number (default 0)
|
|
7393 global
|
|
7394 {not in Vi}
|
|
7395 The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
|
|
7396 screen. When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
|
|
7397 one. For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work. For debugging purposes.
|
|
7398
|
|
7399 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:
|